Page 1

Minia

N1-2011-A

Modular devices

www.oez.com

Minia

Any changes reserved

Modular devices


OEZ s.r.o. Šedivská 339 561 51 Letohrad Czech Republic tel.: +420 465 672 111 +420 465 672 101 fax: +420 465 672 398 +420 465 672 151 e-mail: oeztrade.cz@oez.com www.oez.com

www.oez.com


Modular devices

Minia

CONTENTS INDEX...................................................................................................................................................A

MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS...................................................................................................................B

RESIDUAL CURRENT CIRCUIT BREAKERS.....................................................................................................C

OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTIONS.........................................................................................................................D

OTHER DEVICES..................................................................................................................................................E

GLOSSARY............................................................................................................................................................F

We recommend to use Modular devices in plastic and steel-plastic switchboards DistriTon, see catalogue Distribution boards and switchboard cabinets Distri.


Minia

Modular devices

INDEX

A

O

U

APN.............................................E29 AS................................................E57 AST..............................................E29 AVN.............................................E32

OD-LP-MP01............................... B30 OD-LP-VP01................................ B29 OD-LP-VU01................................B28 OD-MIR....................................... E20 OFE..............................................C14 OFI...............................................C17 OLE..............................................C2 OLI...............................................C6

UMB............................................E47 UMZ............................................ E47 UNZ.............................................E48 UNZR...........................................E48 UTZ..............................................E48

C CS-FH000.................................... E59 CS-L.............................................E59 CS-N............................................E59 CS-PE.......................................... E59

E EKC..............................................E53 ES-35-GS.....................................E53

P

Z ZSE..............................................E51 ZSF...............................................E51

PS-LP...........................................B19 PS-LS...........................................B19 PS-LV...........................................C12 PS-OF...........................................C22 PS-OF125....................................C22 PS-RSI......................................... E6

G G1L..............................................E52 G2L..............................................E52 G3L..............................................E52 G4L..............................................E52

L LPE..............................................B2 LPN............................................. B7 LST...............................................B15

M MAP.............................................E27 MAR............................................ E27 MCR.............................................E13 MIR............................................. E20 MKA............................................E45 MQA............................................E24 MQB............................................E24 MQC............................................ E24 MSK.............................................E38 MSP............................................. E32 MST............................................. E40 MT2.............................................E42 MTR.............................................E17 MTX.............................................E42

R RLP.............................................. E11 RPR............................................. E2 RSI...............................................E4, E5

S S1L..............................................E52 S2L..............................................E52 S3L..............................................E52 S4L..............................................E52 SC................................................E35, E43, E45 SD................................................E35, E43, E45 SE................................................E35, E43, E45 SG................................................E35, E43, E45 SJB.............................................. D3, D4 SJBC............................................ D8 SP-LP........................................... B25 SP-LS...........................................B25 SVBC............................................D9 SVC..............................................D12 SVD..............................................D16 SVF...............................................D19 SV-LP...........................................B22 SV-LS...........................................B22 SVM.............................................D13

T N N3x10-FH000..............................E57

TB................................................E37, E40 TC................................................E37, E40 TE................................................E37, E40 TG................................................E37, E40

A3


Minia NOTES

A4

Modular devices


Minia

‰Miniature circuit breakers LPE up to 63 A (6 kA).........................................................B2 ‰Miniature circuit breakers LPN up to 63 A (10 kA)......................................................B7 ‰Miniature circuit breakers LST up to 125 A (10 kA)..................................................B15 ‰Auxiliary and relative switches..........................................................................................B19 ‰Shunt trips..................................................................................................................................... B22 ‰Undervoltage releases............................................................................................................. B25 ‰Locking insert.............................................................................................................................. B28 ‰Sealing insert...............................................................................................................................B29 ‰Insulating barriers.....................................................................................................................B30

MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS

B


Minia

LPE

Miniature circuit breakers

MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS LPE UP TO 63 A (6 kA) „Series of circuit breakers for building, housing and similar

„Wide range of accessories – auxiliary and relative

installations up to 63 A, 230/400 V a.c. and 60/220 V d.c. „For protection of cables and conductors against overload and short-circuit. „Tripping characteristics B, C according to EN 60898. „Current-limiting circuit breakers.

switches, undervoltage releases and shunt trips, interconnecting busbars etc. „Possibility of locking and sealing in off or on position. „Possibility of interconnection with residual current circuit breakers OLE (OLI) and OFE (OFI) by means of interconnecting busbars.

Miniature circuit breakers, 1-pole In

Characteristic B

[A]

Type

2 4 6 10 13 16 20 25 32 40 50 63

LPE-2B-1 LPE-4B-1 LPE-6B-1 LPE-10B-1 LPE-13B-1 LPE-16B-1 LPE-20B-1 LPE-25B-1 LPE-32B-1 LPE-40B-1 LPE-50B-1 LPE-63B-1

Characteristic C Product code 34528 34529 34530 34532 34533 34534 34535 34536 34537 34538 34539 34540

Type LPE-2C-1 LPE-4C-1 LPE-6C-1 LPE-10C-1 LPE-13C-1 LPE-16C-1 LPE-20C-1 LPE-25C-1 LPE-32C-1 LPE-40C-1 LPE-50C-1 LPE-63C-1

Product code

Number of modules

Weight [kg]

Package [pcs]

34549 34550 34551 34553 34554 34555 34556 34557 34558 34559 34560 34561

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

0.135 0.135 0.135 0.135 0.135 0.135 0.135 0.135 0.135 0.135 0.135 0.135

12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12

Product code

Number of modules

Weight [kg]

Package [pcs]

34676 34677 34678 34680 34681 34682 34683 34684 34685 34686 34687 34688

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

0.26 0.26 0.26 0.26 0.26 0.26 0.26 0.26 0.26 0.26 0.26 0.26

6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6

Product code

Number of modules

Weight [kg]

Package [pcs]

34891 34892 34893 34895 34896 34897 34898 34899 34900 34901 34902 34903

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

0.39 0.39 0.39 0.39 0.39 0.39 0.39 0.39 0.39 0.39 0.39 0.39

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

Miniature circuit breakers, 2-pole In

Characteristic B

[A]

Type

2 4 6 10 13 16 20 25 32 40 50 63

LPE-2B-2 LPE-4B-2 LPE-6B-2 LPE-10B-2 LPE-13B-2 LPE-16B-2 LPE-20B-2 LPE-25B-2 LPE-32B-2 LPE-40B-2 LPE-50B-2 LPE-63B-2

Characteristic C Product code 34655 34656 34657 34659 34660 34661 34662 34663 34664 34665 34666 34667

Type LPE-2C-2 LPE-4C-2 LPE-6C-2 LPE-10C-2 LPE-13C-2 LPE-16C-2 LPE-20C-2 LPE-25C-2 LPE-32C-2 LPE-40C-2 LPE-50C-2 LPE-63C-2

Miniature circuit breakers, 3-pole In

Characteristic B

[A]

Type

2 4 6 10 13 16 20 25 32 40 50 63

LPE-2B-3 LPE-4B-3 LPE-6B-3 LPE-10B-3 LPE-13B-3 LPE-16B-3 LPE-20B-3 LPE-25B-3 LPE-32B-3 LPE-40B-3 LPE-50B-3 LPE-63B-3

Characteristic C Product code 34870 34871 34872 34874 34875 34876 34877 34878 34879 34880 34881 34882

Type LPE-2C-3 LPE-4C-3 LPE-6C-3 LPE-10C-3 LPE-13C-3 LPE-16C-3 LPE-20C-3 LPE-25C-3 LPE-32C-3 LPE-40C-3 LPE-50C-3 LPE-63C-3

Accessories Auxiliary and relative switches Shunt trips Undervoltage releases Locking insert Sealing insert Insulating barriers Interconnecting busbars Terminal extensions

B2

PS-LP-.. SV-LP-.. SP-LP-.. OD-LP-VU01 OD-LP-VP01 OD-LP-MP01 G1L-.., G2L-.., G3L-.., S1L-.., S2L-.., S3L-.. AS-..

page B19 page B22 page B25 page B28 page B29 page B30 page E52 page E57


LPE

Minia

Miniature circuit breakers

MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS LPE UP TO 63 A (6 kA) Description NOTICEABLE CONTACT STATE INDICATOR

NON-INTERCHANGEABILITY OF RATED CURRENT

„Unambiguously define the state of the circuit breaker.

„Non-removable coloured sign according to the rated

Lever down

current of the circuit breaker. Target colours correspond with the colours of the threaded fuse-links.

Lever up

In [A]

SWITCHED OFF

2 4 6 10 13 16 20 25 32 40 50 63

SWITCHED ON

EASY CONNECTION „Upper and lower combined terminal with a secured screw

makes it possible to connect interconnecting busbars with forks and conductors up to 25 mm2 by one screw. „ Plastic cover fills in the space under the terminal and thus prevents wrong insertion of conductor to the terminal. „ Top and bottom connection of circuit breakers by the interconnecting busbar. „Bottom connection of circuit breakers and residual current circuit breakers by the interconnecting busbar. „Interconnecting busbars and terminal extensions see on page E52 - E57.

Colour „ „ „ „ „ „ „ „ „ „ „ „

pink brown green red sandy grey blue yellow violet black white copper

„Printing on circuit breaker is made by a laser – it is

indelible.

WITHDRAWAL OF CIRCUIT BREAKER FROM THE LINE OF DEVICES „Without interruption of adjacent current circuits. „Provided by special top and bottom pawl. „Withdrawal at top connection (circuit breakers, tumbler

power switches) and at bottom connection (circuit breakers and residual current circuit breakers). Secured screw For interconnecting busbars with forks For conductors up to 25 mm2 Plastic cover For interconnecting busbars wiht pins

Top connection

Bottom connection

B3


Minia

LPE

Miniature circuit breakers

MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS LPE UP TO 63 A (6 kA) Specifications Type

LPE

Standards Approval marks

EN 60898-1

Number of poles Tripping characteristics Rated current Rated operating voltage Max. operating voltage Min. operating voltage Rated frequency Rated short-circuit breaking capacity (EN 60898) Endurance

1, 2, 3 B, C 2 ÷ 63 A 230/400 V a.c. / 60/220 V d.c. 1) 253/440 V a.c. / 66/242 V d.c. 1) 12 V a.c. / d.c. 40 ÷ 60 Hz 6 kA 20 000 operating cycles 4 000 operating cycles 3 6 kV IV TH 35 IP20 0.5 ÷ 25 mm2, 2x(0.5 ÷10) mm2 0.5 ÷ 16 mm2 2 mm 2 Nm yes -30 ÷ +55 °C arbitrary IEC 980:1993 2)

Energy limitation class Rated impulse withstand voltage (1.2/50 μs) Overvoltage category (IEC 664-1) Mounting on “U” rail according to EN 60715 - type Degree of protection Connection

Operating conditions

1) 2)

In Ue Umax Umin fn Icn mechanical electrical Uimp

conductor Cu - rigid (solid, stranded) conductor Cu - flexible interconnecting busbar IEC - thickness torque top or bottom connection ambient temperature working position seismic resistance

Single-pole connection / two-pole connection It passed the seismic tests for NPP Dukovany and Temelín

Internal impedance Z, powers losses P, impedance Zs In Z 1) P 1) [A] [mΩ/pole] [W/pole] 2 375.00 1.50 4 98.00 1.55 6 26.00 0.95 10 12.60 1.25 13 10.80 1.85 16 7.56 1.95 20 5.70 2.30 25 4.24 2.65 32 2.72 2.80 40 2.18 3.50 50 1.56 3.90 63 1.37 5.40 1) Average values per pole protected 2) For TN network. U = 230 V, break time up to 0.4 s; if the measured value exceeds the table value, use residual current circuit breaker

Max. impedance of fault loop Zs [Ω] 2) characteristic B characteristic C 23.1 12.8 11.6 6.4 7.7 4.3 4.6 2.6 3.6 2.0 2.9 1.6 2.3 1.3 1.8 1.0 1.4 0.8 1.2 0.6 0.9 0.5 0.7 0.4

Correction of rated currents of miniature circuit breakers LPE Correction of rated currents for ambient temperature -30 °C up to + 60 °C [A] 1) In [A] -30 °C -20 °C -10 °C 0 °C 10 °C 20 °C 30 °C 40 °C 50 °C 2 2.6 2.5 2.4 2.3 2.2 2.1 2 1.9 1.8 4 5.2 5 4.8 4.6 4.4 4.2 4 3.7 3.5 6 7.8 7.5 7.2 6.9 6.6 6.3 6 5.6 5.3 10 13 12.5 12 11.5 11 10.5 10 9.3 8.8 13 16.9 16.3 15.6 15 14.3 13.7 13 12.1 11.4 16 20.8 20 19.2 18.4 17.6 16.8 16 14.9 14.1 20 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 18.6 17.6 25 32.5 31.3 30 28.8 27.5 26.3 25 23.3 22 32 41.6 40 38.4 36.8 35.2 33.6 32 29.8 28.2 40 52 50 48 46 44 42 40 37.2 35.2 50 65 62.5 60 57.5 55 52.5 50 46.5 44 63 81.9 78.8 75.6 72.5 69.3 66.2 63 58.6 55.4 1) Valid for 1 pole and any characteristic at reference temperature 30 °C

B4

60 °C 1.7 3.4 5 8.4 10.9 13.4 16.8 21 26.9 33.6 42 52.9

Correction of rated currents of miniature circuit breakers installed side by side [A] 2) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 2 1.9 1.8 1.8 1.7 1.7 1.7 1.7 4 3.8 3.7 3.6 3.5 3.4 3.4 3.4 6 5.7 5.5 5.3 5.2 5.1 5.1 5.1 10 9.5 9.2 8.9 8.7 8.5 8.5 8.5 13 12.4 11.9 11.6 11.3 11.1 11.1 11.1 16 15.2 14.7 14.2 13.9 13.6 13.6 13.6 20 19 18.3 17.8 17.3 17.1 17 17 25 23.8 22.9 22.3 21.7 21.3 21.3 21.3 32 30.4 29.3 28.5 27.7 27.3 27.2 27.2 40 38 36.6 25.6 34.7 34.1 34 34 50 47.5 45.8 44.5 43.4 42.7 42.5 42.5 63 59.9 57.7 56.1 54.6 53.7 53.6 53.6 2) Valid for reference temperature 30 °C


LPE

Minia

Miniature circuit breakers

MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS LPE UP TO 63 A (6 kA) Selectivity of LPE miniature circuit breakers characteristics B with back-up fuses [kA] LPE In [A] 20 2 x 4 x 6 x 10 x 13 x 16 x 20 x 25 x 32 x 40 x 50 x 63 x x - without selectivity

25 1 1 1 1 x x x x x x x x

32 6 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 x x x x x x

PN, PV gG 40 50 6 6 6 6 2 6 2 5 2 2.5 2 2.5 2 2.5 x 2.5 x x x x x x x x

63 6 6 6 6 6 6 5 5 3.5 1 x x

80 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 5 3 3

Selectivity of LPE miniature circuit breakers characteristics C with back-up fuses [kA] LPE In [A] 20 2 x 4 x 6 x 10 x 13 x 16 x 20 x 25 x 32 x 40 x 50 x 63 x x - without selectivity

100 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6

The time selectivity of particular combination up to the value of short-circuit current Ik´´shown in the table is ensured in case of short-circuit behind the LPE circuit breaker with back-up fuse-link. Which means that at short-circuit of particular combination under the Ik´´value only the circuit breaker actuates. In case the short-circuit current value is bigger than Ik´´ value then also the back-up fuse-link actuates.

25 1 1 1 x x x x x x x x x

PN, PV gG 40 50 6 6 6 6 2 6 2 5 2 2.5 2 2.5 x 2.5 x 2.5 x x x x x x x x

32 6 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 x x x x x x

63 6 6 6 6 6 6 5 5 3.5 x x x

80 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 5 3 x

100 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6

PV, PN gG

Example: Circuit breaker LPE-16B-... actuates earlier than back-up fuse-link with rated current 50 A up to short-circuit current 2.5 kA.

LPE

Ik

Dimensions ~73 ~4.5

17.5

~4.5

52.5

35

64

45

86

LPE-..-3

35

LPE-..-2

~90

LPE-..-1

44 72

Diagram LPE-..-1

LPE-..-2

LPE-..-3

1

1

3

1

3

5

2

2

4

2

4

6

B5


Minia

LPE

Miniature circuit breakers

MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS LPE UP TO 63 A (6 kA) Characteristics 1.13 In 1.45 In

„Characteristic B: for protection of line of electrical circuits with equipment, which does not cause At ambient temperature +30°C

10 000 120

current surges (lighting and socket circuits etc.). The short-circuit release is set to (3 ÷ 5) In .

5 000

„Characteristic C: for protection of line of electrical circuits with equipment, which causes current

60

surges (light bulb groups, motors etc.). The short-circuit release is set to (6 ÷ 9) In .

min.

30 1 000 10

500

5 2

100

1

50

Tripping characteristics of circuit breakers according to EN 60898-1 Tripping characteristic type B, C Int = 1,13 In It = 1,45 In

Thermal release Conventional non-tripping current Int for t ≥ 1 h Conventional tripping current It for t < 1 h Current I3 for 1 s < t < 60 s (for In ≤ 32 A) 1 s < t < 120 s (for In > 32 A) t - break time of the circuit breaker

10 tv [s]

5

1 0.5

B

0.1

C

Tripping characteristic type B C

Electromagnetic release Current I4 pro

0.002

0,1 s < t < 45 s 0,1 s < t < 90 s 0,1 s < t < 15 s 0,1 s < t < 30 s Current I5 for t < 0,1 s

0.001

t - break time of the circuit breaker

0.01 0.006

1

2

3

4

6 8 10

B

C

I3 = 2,55 In

20

30 40

(for In ≤ 32 A) (for In > 32 A) (for In ≤ 32 A) (for In > 32 A)

I4 = 3 In I4 = 5 In I5 = 5 In

I5 = 10 In

60 80 x In

Characteristics I2t LPE-..B-1

LPE-..C-1

90 000 70 000

90 000 70 000

50 000 40 000 30 000

50 000 40 000 30 000

63 A 50 A 40 A 32 A 25 A 20 A 16 A 13 A 10 A

20 000 15 000

20 000 15 000

6A

10 000

4A

7 000

5 000 4 000 3 000

5 000 4 000 3 000

4A 2A

2 000 1 500

2A

1 000

I p [A]

I p [A]

15 000

10 000

5 000 6 000

20

4 000

20

15 000

50 40 30

10 000

70

50 40 30

5 000 6 000

100

70

4 000

100

3 000

200 150

2 000

200 150

1 500

500 400 300

3 000

700

500 400 300

2 000

700

1 500

1 000

800 900 1 000

I 2t [A2 s]

2 000 1 500

800 900 1 000

I 2t [A2 s]

6A

10 000

7 000

B6

63 A 50 A 40 A 32 A 25 A 20 A 16 A 13 A 10 A


LPN

Minia

Miniature circuit breakers

MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS LPN UP TO 63 A (10 kA) „For building, commercial and industrial installations

„Possibility of interconnection with residual current

up to 63 A 230/400 V a.c. and 220/440 V d.c. „For protection of cables and conductors against overload and short-circuit. „Tripping characteristics B, C, D according to EN 60898. „Current-limiting circuit breakers. „Wide range of accessories – auxiliary and relative switches, undervoltage releases and shunt trips, interconnecting busbars etc. „Breaking capacity Icn 10 kA – to achieve higher Icn (up to 120 kA) it is recommended to use cylindrical fuse-links PV in fuse switch-disconnectors.

circuit breakers OLE (OLI) and OFE (OFI) by means of interconnecting busbars. „Possibility of locking and sealing in off or on position. „N-pole of circuit breakers LPN-...-1N and LPN-...-3N contains neither thermal nor short-circuit release, in switching on it closes before and in switching off it opens after the other poles. „For circuit breakers LPN-DC-... device polarity must be always observed in connecting.

Miniature circuit breakers, 1-pole In

Characteristic B

[A]

Type

0.2 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.8 1 1.2 1.6 2 4 6 8 10 13 16 20 25 32 40 50 63

LPN-0,2B-1 LPN-0,4B-1 LPN-0,6B-1 LPN-0,8B-1 LPN-1B-1 LPN-1,2B-1 LPN-1,6B-1 LPN-2B-1 LPN-4B-1 LPN-6B-1 LPN-8B-1 LPN-10B-1 LPN-13B-1 LPN-16B-1 LPN-20B-1 LPN-25B-1 LPN-32B-1 LPN-40B-1 LPN-50B-1 LPN-63B-1

Characteristic C Product code 34159 34160 34161 33863 33864 33865 33866 33867 33868 33869 33870 33871 33872 33873 33874 33875 33876 33877 33878 33879

Type LPN-0,2C-1 LPN-0,4C-1 LPN-0,5C-1 LPN-0,6C-1 LPN-0,8C-1 LPN-1C-1 LPN-1,2C-1 LPN-1,6C-1 LPN-2C-1 LPN-4C-1 LPN-6C-1 LPN-8C-1 LPN-10C-1 LPN-13C-1 LPN-16C-1 LPN-20C-1 LPN-25C-1 LPN-32C-1 LPN-40C-1 LPN-50C-1 LPN-63C-1

Characteristic D Product code 33880 33881 33882 33883 33884 33885 33886 33887 33888 33889 33890 33891 33892 33893 33894 33895 33896 33897 33898 33899 33900

Type LPN-0,2D-1 LPN-0,4D-1 LPN-0,5D-1 LPN-0,6D-1 LPN-0,8D-1 LPN-1D-1 LPN-1,2D-1 LPN-1,6D-1 LPN-2D-1 LPN-4D-1 LPN-6D-1 LPN-8D-1 LPN-10D-1 LPN-13D-1 LPN-16D-1 LPN-20D-1 LPN-25D-1 LPN-32D-1 LPN-40D-1 LPN-50D-1 LPN-63D-1

Product code 33901 33902 33903 33904 33905 33906 33907 33908 33909 33910 33911 33912 33913 33914 33915 33916 33917 33918 33919 33920 33921

Number of modules

Weight [kg]

Package [pcs]

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

0.135 0.135 0.135 0.135 0.135 0.135 0.135 0.135 0.135 0.135 0.135 0.135 0.135 0.135 0.135 0.135 0.135 0.135 0.135 0.135 0.135

12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12

Number of modules

Weight [kg]

Package [pcs]

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25

6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6

Miniature circuit breakers 1+N-pole In

Characteristic B

[A]

Type

2 4 6 8 10 13 16 20 25 32 40 50 63

LPN-6B-1N LPN-8B-1N LPN-10B-1N LPN-13B-1N LPN-16B-1N LPN-20B-1N LPN-25B-1N LPN-32B-1N LPN-40B-1N LPN-50B-1N LPN-63B-1N

Characteristic C Product code 33922 33923 33924 33925 33926 33927 33928 33929 33930 33931 33932

Type LPN-2C-1N LPN-4C-1N LPN-6C-1N LPN-8C-1N LPN-10C-1N LPN-13C-1N LPN-16C-1N LPN-20C-1N LPN-25C-1N LPN-32C-1N LPN-40C-1N LPN-50C-1N LPN-63C-1N

Characteristic D Product code 33933 33934 33935 33936 33937 33938 33939 33940 33941 33942 33943 33944 33945

Type LPN-6D-1N LPN-8D-1N LPN-10D-1N LPN-13D-1N LPN-16D-1N LPN-20D-1N LPN-25D-1N LPN-32D-1N LPN-40D-1N LPN-50D-1N LPN-63D-1N

Product code 33946 33947 33948 33949 33950 33951 33952 33953 33954 33955 33956

B7


Minia

LPN

Miniature circuit breakers

MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS LPN UP TO 63 A (10 kA) Miniature circuit breakers, 2-pole In

Characteristic B

[A] Type 0.2 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.8 1 1.2 1.6 2 4 6 8 10 13 16 20 25 32 40 50 63

LPN-1B-2 LPN-2B-2 LPN-4B-2 LPN-6B-2 LPN-8B-2 LPN-10B-2 LPN-13B-2 LPN-16B-2 LPN-20B-2 LPN-25B-2 LPN-32B-2 LPN-40B-2 LPN-50B-2 LPN-63B-2

Characteristic C Product code 34162 34163 34164 33957 33958 33959 33960 33961 33962 33963 33964 33965 33966 33967

Type LPN-0,2C-2 LPN-0,4C-2 LPN-0,5C-2 LPN-0,6C-2 LPN-0,8C-2 LPN-1C-2 LPN-1,2C-2 LPN-1,6C-2 LPN-2C-2 LPN-4C-2 LPN-6C-2 LPN-8C-2 LPN-10C-2 LPN-13C-2 LPN-16C-2 LPN-20C-2 LPN-25C-2 LPN-32C-2 LPN-40C-2 LPN-50C-2 LPN-63C-2

Characteristic D Product code 33968 33969 33970 33971 33972 33973 33974 33975 33976 33977 33978 33979 33980 33981 33982 33983 33984 33985 33986 33987 33988

Type LPN-0,2D-2 LPN-0,4D-2 LPN-0,5D-2 LPN-0,6D-2 LPN-0,8D-2 LPN-1D-2 LPN-1,2D-2 LPN-1,6D-2 LPN-2D-2 LPN-4D-2 LPN-6D-2 LPN-8D-2 LPN-10D-2 LPN-13D-2 LPN-16D-2 LPN-20D-2 LPN-25D-2 LPN-32D-2 LPN-40D-2 -

Product code 33989 33990 33991 33992 33993 33994 33995 33996 33997 33998 33999 34000 34001 34002 34003 34004 34005 34006 34007 -

Number of modules

Weight [kg]

Package [pcs]

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

0.26 0.26 0.26 0.26 0.26 0.26 0.26 0.26 0.26 0.26 0.26 0.26 0.26 0.26 0.26 0.26 0.26 0.26 0.26 0.26 0.26

6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6

Number of modules

Weight [kg]

Package [pcs]

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

0.39 0.39 0.39 0.39 0.39 0.39 0.39 0.39 0.39 0.39 0.39 0.39 0.39 0.39 0.39 0.39 0.39 0.39 0.39 0.39 0.39

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

Number of modules

Weight [kg]

Package [pcs]

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

0.505 0.505 0.505 0.505 0.505 0.505 0.505 0.505 0.505 0.505 0.505 0.505 0.505

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

Miniature circuit breakers, 3-pole In

Characteristic B

[A] Type 0.2 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.8 1 1.2 1.6 2 4 6 8 10 13 16 20 25 32 40 50 63

LPN-0,2B-3 LPN-0,5B-3 LPN-0,6B-3 LPN-0,8B-3 LPN-1B-3 LPN-1,2B-3 LPN-1,6B-3 LPN-2B-3 LPN-4B-3 LPN-6B-3 LPN-8B-3 LPN-10B-3 LPN-13B-3 LPN-16B-3 LPN-20B-3 LPN-25B-3 LPN-32B-3 LPN-40B-3 LPN-50B-3 LPN-63B-3

Characteristic C Product code 34165 34008 34009 34010 34011 34012 34013 34014 34015 34016 34017 34018 34019 34020 34021 34022 34023 34024 34025 34026

Type LPN-0,2C-3 LPN-0,4C-3 LPN-0,5C-3 LPN-0,6C-3 LPN-0,8C-3 LPN-1C-3 LPN-1,2C-3 LPN-1,6C-3 LPN-2C-3 LPN-4C-3 LPN-6C-3 LPN-8C-3 LPN-10C-3 LPN-13C-3 LPN-16C-3 LPN-20C-3 LPN-25C-3 LPN-32C-3 LPN-40C-3 LPN-50C-3 LPN-63C-3

Characteristic D Product code 34027 34028 34029 34030 34031 34032 34033 34034 34035 34036 34037 34038 34039 34040 34041 34042 34043 34044 34045 34046 34047

Type LPN-0,2D-3 LPN-0,4D-3 LPN-0,5D-3 LPN-0,6D-3 LPN-0,8D-3 LPN-1D-3 LPN-1,2D-3 LPN-1,6D-3 LPN-2D-3 LPN-4D-3 LPN-6D-3 LPN-8D-3 LPN-10D-3 LPN-13D-3 LPN-16D-3 LPN-20D-3 LPN-25D-3 LPN-32D-3 LPN-40D-3 LPN-50D-3 LPN-63D-3

Product code 34048 34049 34050 34051 34052 34053 34054 34055 34056 34057 34058 34059 34060 34061 34062 34063 34064 34065 34066 34067 34068

Miniature circuit breakers, 3+N-pole In

Characteristic B

[A] Type 2 4 6 8 10 13 16 20 25 32 40 50 63

B8

LPN-2B-3N LPN-4B-3N LPN-6B-3N LPN-8B-3N LPN-10B-3N LPN-13B-3N LPN-16B-3N LPN-20B-3N LPN-25B-3N LPN-32B-3N LPN-40B-3N LPN-50B-3N LPN-63B-3N

Characteristic C Product code 34069 34070 34071 34072 34073 34074 34075 34076 34077 34078 34079 34080 34081

Type LPN-6C-3N LPN-8C-3N LPN-10C-3N LPN-13C-3N LPN-16C-3N LPN-20C-3N LPN-25C-3N LPN-32C-3N LPN-40C-3N LPN-50C-3N LPN-63C-3N

Characteristic D Product code 34082 34083 34084 34085 34086 34087 34088 34089 34090 34091 34092

Type LPN-6D-3N LPN-8D-3N LPN-10D-3N LPN-13D-3N LPN-16D-3N LPN-20D-3N LPN-25D-3N LPN-32D-3N LPN-40D-3N -

Product code 34093 34094 34095 34096 34097 34098 34099 34100 34101 -


LPN

Minia

Miniature circuit breakers

MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS LPN UP TO 63 A (10 kA) DC miniature circuit breakers, 1-pole In

Characteristic C

[A]

Type

2 4 6 8 10 13 16 20 25 32 40 50 63

LPN-DC-2C-1 LPN-DC-4C-1 LPN-DC-6C-1 LPN-DC-8C-1 LPN-DC-10C-1 LPN-DC-13C-1 LPN-DC-16C-1 LPN-DC-20C-1 LPN-DC-25C-1 LPN-DC-32C-1 LPN-DC-40C-1 LPN-DC-50C-1 LPN-DC-63C-1

Product code

Number of modules

Weight [kg]

Package [pcs]

34115 34116 34117 34118 34119 34120 34121 34122 34123 34124 34125 34126 34127

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

0.14 0.14 0.14 0.14 0.14 0.14 0.14 0.14 0.14 0.14 0.14 0.14 0.14

12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12

Product code

Number of modules

Weight [kg]

Package [pcs]

34141 34142 34143 34144 34145 34146 34147 34148 34149 34150 34151 34152 34153

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

0.27 0.27 0.27 0.27 0.27 0.27 0.27 0.27 0.27 0.27 0.27 0.27 0.27

6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6

DC miniature circuit breakers, 2-pole In

Characteristic C

[A]

Type

2 4 6 8 10 13 16 20 25 32 40 50 63

LPN-DC-2C-2 LPN-DC-4C-2 LPN-DC-6C-2 LPN-DC-8C-2 LPN-DC-10C-2 LPN-DC-13C-2 LPN-DC-16C-2 LPN-DC-20C-2 LPN-DC-25C-2 LPN-DC-32C-2 LPN-DC-40C-2 LPN-DC-50C-2 LPN-DC-63C-2

Accessories Auxiliary and relative switches Shunt trips Undervoltage releases Locking insert Sealing insert Insulating barriers Interconnecting busbars Terminal extensions

PS-LP-.. SV-LP-.. SP-LP-.. OD-LP-VU01 OD-LP-VP01 OD-LP-MP01 G1L-.., G2L-.., G3L-.., G4L-.., S1L-.., S2L-.., S3L-.. AS-..

page B19 page B22 page B25 page B28 page B29 page B30 page E52 page E57

B9


Minia

LPN

Miniature circuit breakers

MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS LPN UP TO 63 A (10 kA) Description NOTICEABLE CONTACT STATE INDICATOR

NON-INTERCHANGEABILITY OF RATED CURRENT

„Unambiguously define the state of the circuit breaker.

„Non-removable coloured sign according to the rated

Lever down

current of the circuit breaker. Target colours correspond with the colours of the threaded fuse-links.

Lever up

In [A]

SWITCHED OFF

0.2 ÷ 1.6 2 4 6 8 10 13 16 20 25 32 40 50 63

SWITCHED ON

EASY CONNECTION

„Upper and lower combined terminal with a secured

screw makes it possible to connect interconnecting busbars with forks and conductors up to 25 mm2 by one screw. „ Plastic cover fills in the space under the terminal and thus prevents wrong insertion of conductor to the terminal. „Top and bottom connection of circuit breakers by the interconnecting busbar. „Bottom connection of circuit breakers and residual current circuit breakers by the interconnecting busbar. „Interconnecting busbars and terminal extensions see on page E52 - E57.

Colour „ „ „ „ „ „ „ „ „ „ „ „ „ „

black pink brown green light green red sandy grey blue yellow violet black white copper

„Printing on circuit breaker is made by a laser – it is

indelible.

WITHDRAWAL OF CIRCUIT BREAKER FROM THE LINE OF DEVICES „Without interruption of adjacent current circuits. „Provided by special top and bottom pawl. „Withdrawal at top connection (circuit breakers, tumbler

power switches) and at bottom connection (circuit breakers and residual current circuit breakers). Secured screw For interconnecting busbars with forks For conductors up to 25 mm2 Plastic cover For interconnecting busbars wiht pins

Top connection

B10

Bottom connection


LPN

Minia

Miniature circuit breakers

MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS LPN UP TO 63 A (10 kA) Specifications Type

LPN

LPN-DC

Standards Approval marks

EN 60898-1

EN 60898-2

Number of poles Tripping characteristics Rated current Rated operating voltage Max. operating voltage Min. operating voltage Rated frequency Rated short-circuit breaking capacity (EN 60898-1) Rated short-circuit breaking capacity (EN 60898-2) Short-circuit service breaking capacity (EN 60898-2) mechanical Endurance electrical

1, 1+N, 2, 3, 3+N B, C, D 0.2 ÷ 63 A 230/400 V a.c. / 60/220 V d.c. 2) 253/440 V a.c. / 66/242 V d.c. 2) 12 V a.c. / d.c. 40 ÷ 60 Hz 10 kA 20 000 operating cycles 4 000 operating cycles 3 6 kV IV TH 35 IP20 0.5 ÷ 25 mm2, 2x(0.5 ÷ 10) mm2 0.5 ÷ 16 mm2 2 mm 2 Nm yes -30 ÷ +55 °C arbitrary IEC 980:1993 4)

1, 2 C 2 ÷ 63 A 220/440 V d.c. 2) 242/484 V d.c. 2) 12 V d.c. 10 kA (τ ≤ 5 ms) 100 % Icn 20 000 operating cycles 4 000 operating cycles 3 6 kV IV TH 35 IP20 0.5 ÷ 25 mm2, 2x(0.5 ÷ 10) mm2 0.5 ÷ 16 mm2 2 mm 2 Nm yes 3) -30 ÷ +55 °C arbitrary IEC 980:1993 4)

Energy limitation class Rated impulse withstand voltage (1.2/50 μs) Overvoltage category (IEC 664-1) Mounting on “U” rail according to EN - type Degree of protection Connection

Operating conditions

In Ue Umax Umin fn Icn Icn Ics

Uimp

conductor Cu - rigid (solid, stranded) conductor Cu - flexible interconnecting busbar IEC - thickness torque top or bottom connection ambient temperature working position seismic resistance

1)

1)

DC tests Single-pole connection / two-pole connection 3) It is necessary to keep the polarity marked on the circuit breaker in d.c. circuits 4) It passed the seismic tests for NPP Dukovany and Temelín 2)

Internal impedance Z, powers losses P, impedance Zs In Z 1) P 1) [A] [mΩ/pole] [W/pole] characteristic B 0.2 30650 1.25 230.9 0.4 7670 1.25 115.5 0.5 5440 1.35 92.4 0.6 3400 1.20 77.0 0.8 2130 1.35 57.8 1 1350 1.35 46.2 1.2 763 1.10 38.5 1.6 544 1.40 28.9 2 392 1.55 23.1 4 75.50 1.20 11.6 6 26.00 0.95 7.7 8 17.40 1.10 5.8 10 12.60 1.25 4.6 13 10.80 1.85 3.6 16 7.56 1.95 2.9 20 5.70 2.30 2.3 25 4.24 2.65 1.8 32 2.72 2.80 1.4 40 2.18 3.50 1.2 50 1.56 3.90 0.9 63 1.37 5.40 0.7 1) Average values per pole protected 2) For TN network, U = 230 V, break time up to 0.4 s; if the measured value exceeds the table value, use residual current circuit breaker

Max. impedance of fault loop Zs [Ω] 2) characteristic C 128.3 64.2 51.3 42.8 32.1 25.7 21.4 16.0 12.8 6.4 4.3 3.2 2.6 2.0 1.6 1.3 1.0 0.8 0.6 0.5 0.4

characteristic D 72.2 36.1 28.9 24.1 18.0 14.4 12.0 9.0 7.2 3.6 2.4 1.8 1.4 1.1 0.9 0.7 0.6 0.5 0.4 0.3 0.2

B11


Minia

LPN

Miniature circuit breakers

MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS LPN UP TO 63 A (10 kA) Correction of rated currents of miniature circuit breakers LPN

1)

Correction of rated currents for ambient temperature -30 °C up to + 60 °C [A] 1) In [A] -30 °C -20 °C -10 °C 0 °C 10 °C 20 °C 30 °C 40 °C 50 °C 0.2 0.26 0.25 0.24 0.23 0.22 0.21 0.2 0.19 0.18 0.4 0.52 0.50 0.48 0.46 0.44 0.42 0.4 0.37 0.35 0.5 0.65 0.63 0.60 0.58 0.55 0.53 0.5 0.47 0.44 0.6 0.78 0.75 0.72 0.69 0.66 0.63 0.6 0.56 0.53 0.8 1.04 1 0.96 0.92 0.88 0.84 0.8 0.74 0.70 1 1.30 1.25 1.20 1.15 1.10 1.05 1 0.93 0.88 1.2 1.56 1.50 1.44 1.38 1.32 1.26 1.2 1.12 1.06 1.6 2.08 2 1.92 1.84 1.76 1.68 1.6 1.49 1.41 2 2.60 2.50 2.40 2.30 2.20 2.10 2 1.90 1.80 4 5.20 5 4.80 4.60 4.40 4.20 4 3.70 3.50 6 7.80 7.50 7.20 6.90 6.60 6.30 6 5.60 5.30 8 10.40 10 9.60 9.20 8.80 8.40 8 7.40 7 10 13 12.50 12 11.50 11 10.50 10 9.30 8.80 13 16.90 16.30 15.60 15 14.30 13.70 13 12.10 11.40 16 20.80 20 19.20 18.40 17.60 16.80 16 14.90 14.10 20 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 18.60 17.60 25 23.30 22 25 32.50 31.30 30 28.80 27.50 26.30 32 41.60 40 38.40 36.80 35.20 33.60 32 29.80 28.20 40 52 50 48 46 44 42 40 37.20 35.20 50 65 62.50 60 57.50 55 52.50 50 46.50 44 63 81.90 78.80 75.60 72.50 69.30 66.20 63 58.60 55.40 Valid for 1 pole and any characteristic at reference temperature 30 °C

Selectivity of LPN miniature circuit breakers characteristics B with back-up fuses [kA] LPN In [A] 20 ≤ 1.2 0.5 1.6 0.5 2 x 4 x 6 x 8 x 10 x 13 x 16 x 20 x 25 x 32 x 40 x 50 x 63 x x - without selectivity

25 6 5 1 1 1 1 1 x x x x x x x x

32 10 10 6 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 x x x x x x

PN, PV gG 40 50 10 10 10 10 10 10 6 10 2 6 2 6 2 5 2 2.5 2 2.5 2 2.5 x 2.5 x x x x x x x x

63 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 6 6 5 5 3.5 1 x x

80 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 6 5 3 3

100 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 6 6

60 °C 0.19 0.34 0.42 0.50 0.67 0.84 1.01 1.34 1.70 3.40 5 6.70 8.40 10.90 13.40 16.80 21 26.90 33.60 42 52.90

Correction of rated currents of miniature circuit breakers installed side by side [A] 2) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0.2 0.19 0.18 0.18 0.18 0.17 0.17 0.17 0.4 0.38 0.37 0.36 0.35 0.34 0.34 0.34 0.5 0.48 0.46 0.45 0.44 0.43 0.43 0.43 0.6 0.57 0.55 0.53 0.52 0.51 0.51 0.51 0.8 0.76 0.73 0.71 0.69 0.68 0.68 0.68 1 0.95 0.92 0.89 0.87 0.86 0.85 0.85 1.2 1.14 1.10 1.07 1.04 1.02 1.02 1.02 1.6 1.52 1.47 1.42 1.39 1.37 1.36 1.36 2 1.90 1.80 1.80 1.70 1.70 1.70 1.70 4 3.80 3.70 3.60 3.50 3.40 3.40 3.40 6 5.70 5.50 5.30 5.20 5.10 5.10 5.10 8 7.60 7.30 7.10 6.90 6.80 6.80 6.80 10 9.50 9.20 8.90 8.70 8.60 8.50 8.50 13 12.40 11.90 11.60 11.30 11.20 11.10 11.10 16 15.20 14.70 14.20 13.90 13.70 13.60 13.60 20 19 18.30 17.80 17.30 17.10 17 17 25 23.80 22.90 22.30 21.70 21.40 21.30 21.30 32 30.40 29.30 28.50 27.70 27.30 27.20 27.20 40 38 36.60 25.60 34.70 34.10 34 34 50 47.50 45.80 44.50 43.40 42.70 42.50 42.50 63 59.90 57.70 56.10 54.60 53.70 53.60 53.60 2) Valid for reference temperature 30 °C

Selectivity of LPN miniature circuit breakers characteristics C with back-up fuses [kA] LPN In [A] 20 ≤ 1.2 0.5 1.6 0.5 2 x 4 x 6 x 8 x 10 x 13 x 16 x 20 x 25 x 32 x 40 x 50 x 63 x x - without selectivity

25 6 5 1 1 1 1 x x x x x x x x x

32 10 10 6 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 x x x x x x

PN, PV gG 40 50 10 10 10 10 10 10 6 10 2 6 2 6 2 5 2 2.5 2 2.5 x 2.5 x 2.5 x x x x x x x x

63 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 6 6 5 5 3.5 x x x

80 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 6 5 3 x

100 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 6 6

Selectivity of LPN miniature circuit breakers characteristics D with back-up fuses [kA] LPN PN, PV gG In [A] 20 ≤ 1.2 0.5 1.6 0.5 2 x 4 x 6 x 8 x 10 x 13 x 16 x 20 x 25 x 32 x 40 x 50 x 63 x x - without selectivity

B12

25 6 5 1 1 1 x x x x x x x x x x

32 10 10 6 1.5 1.5 1.5 x x x x x x x x x

40 10 10 10 6 2 2 2 x x x x x x x x

50 10 10 10 10 6 6 5 2.5 2.5 x x x x x x

63 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 6 6 5 x x x x x

80 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 6 x x x

100 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 x x

The time selectivity of particular combination up to the value of short-circuit current Ik´´ shown in the table is ensured in case of short-circuit behind the LPN circuit breaker with back-up fuse-link. Which means that at short-circuit of particular combination under the Ik´´value only the circuit breaker actuates. In case the short-circuit current value is bigger than Ik´´, value then also the back-up fuse-link actuates.

PV, PN gG

LPN

Example: Circuit breaker LPN-16B-... actuates earlier than back-up fuse-link with rated current 50 A up to short-circuit current 2.5 kA.

Ik


LPN

Minia

Miniature circuit breakers

MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS LPN UP TO 63 A (10 kA) Dimensions LPN-..-3

LPN-..3N

~73

17.5

64

52.5

35

45

35

~4.5

~4.5

70

86

LPN-..-1N LPN-..-2 LPN-DC-..-2

~90

LPN-..-1 LPN-DC-..-1

44 72

Diagram LPN-..-1

LPN-..-1N

LPN-..-2

LPN-..-3

LPN-..-3N

1

1

N1

1

3

1

3

5

1

3

5

N1

1

1

3

2

2

N2

2

4

2

4

6

2

4

6

N2

2

2

4

Protection of DC circuits

LPN-DC-..-1

1-pole connection LPN-DC

For protection of d.c. circuits it is possible to use LPE, LPN circuit breakers and LPN-DC circuit breakers depending on voltage.

Top connection

2-pole connection LPN-DC

Bottom connection

Source

Top connection

Load

Bottom connection

Source

I

440 V / L+

I 220 V / L+

LPN-DC-..-2

0 V / L-

Load 0 V / L-

I

I I

I

Protection of DC circuits



I

I

LPN-DC-...-2

≤ 440 V d.c. -

LPN-DC-...-2

≤ 220 V d.c. LPE, LPN-...-1  LPE, LPN-...-2   1) LPN-DC-...-1   LPN-DC-...-2 1)   1) It is necessary to keep the polarity marked on the circuit breaker  Possible to use

LPN-DC-...-1

Rated voltage Ue ≤ 60 V d.c.

LPN-DC-...-1

Type of miniature circuit breaker

I 0 V / LI

I

Correct polarity connection of DC circuit breakers, loads etc. in the circuit has to follow the direction of current flow in DC circuit that is from (+) to (-). Example of current flow according to polarity is shown by the arrow:

I

Source

1) Correct connection of devices = equal direction of current flow on the devices

I 0 V / L-

Load

440 V / L+

Source

2) Wrong connection of devices = contradictory current flow on the devices

Load I

I I

Source

Load

Source

I

Miniature circuit breaker

Load

I

220 V / L+

I

I

I

Load

I

The correct connection of devices (point 1) seems to be illogical due to connection of load terminal (+) and circuit breaker terminal (-). However, it is correct connection!!!

B13


Minia

LPN

Miniature circuit breakers

MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS LPN UP TO 63 A (10 kA) Characteristics „Characteristic B: for protection of line of electrical circuits with equipment, which does not cause 1.45 In

1.13 In

current surges (lighting and socket circuits etc.). The short-circuit release is set to (3 ÷ 5) In . „Characteristic C: for protection of line of electrical circuits with equipment, which causes current

At ambient temperature +30°C

10 000

surges (light bulb groups, motors etc.). The short-circuit release is set to (6 ÷ 9) In .

120 5 000 60

„Characteristic D: for protection of line of electrical circuits with equipment, which causes high

min.

30

current surges (transformers, 2-pole motors etc.). The short-circuit release is set to (12 ÷ 16) In .

1 000 10

500

5 2

100

1

Tripping characteristics of circuit breakers according to EN 60898-1

50

Tripping characteristic type B, C, D Int = 1.13 In It = 1.45 In

Thermal release 10

Conventional non-tripping current Int for t ≥ 1 h Conventional tripping current It for t < 1 h Current I3 for 1 s < t < 60 s (for In ≤ 32 A) 1 s < t < 120 s (for In > 32 A) t - break time of the circuit breaker

tv [s]

5

1 0.5

B

0.1

C

D

I3 = 2.55 In

Tripping characteristic type B C

Electromagnetic release Current I4 pro

0.1 s < t < 45 s (for In ≤ 32 A) 0.1 s < t < 90 s (for In > 32 A) 0.1 s < t < 15 s (for In ≤ 32 A) 0.1 s < t < 30 s (for In > 32 A) 0.1 s < t < 4 s 1) (for In ≤ 32 A) 0.1 s < t < 8 s (for In > 32 A) Current I5 for t < 0.1 s

0.01 0.006

0.002 0.001 1

2

3

4

B

6

8 10

C

20

30

40

60

80

D x In

D

I4 = 3 In I 4 = 5 In I4 = 10 In I5 = 5 In

I5 = 10 In

I5 = 20 In

1)

for In ≤ 10 A is permissible that t < 8 s t - break time of the circuit breaker

Characteristics I2t 90 000 70 000

63 A 50 A 40 A 32 A 25 A 20 A 16 A 13 A 10 A 8A

20 000 15 000

6A

20 000 15 000

10 000

10 000

4A

10 000

7 000

7 000

7 000

5 000 4 000 3 000

5 000 4 000 3 000

1.6 - 2 A

2 000 1 500

700 500 400 300

1- 1.2 A

200 150

0.2 - 0.6 A

1 000 700 500 400 300

0.8 A

700

0.8 A 0.2 - 0.6 A

B14

20 000

15 000

5 000 6 000 7 000 8 000 9 000 10 000

3 000

4 000

2 000

1 500

800 900 1 000

15 000

20

20 000

20

5 000 6 000 7 000 8 000 9 000 10 000

20

3 000

50 40 30

4 000

50 40 30

2 000

70

50 40 30

1 500

100

70

800 900 1 000

100

70

I p [A]

0,2 - 0,6 A

200 150

100

I p [A]

0,8 A

1 000 500 400 300

1- 1.2 A

200 150

1- 1,2 A

I p [A]

20 000

1 000

I 2t [A2 s]

I 2t [A2 s]

2 000 1 500

4 000

1.6 - 2 A

2 000 1 500

5 000 6 000 7 000 8 000 9 000 10 000

4A

3 000

5 000 4 000 3 000

4A 1,6 - 2 A

2 000

20 000 15 000

63 A 50 A 40 A 32 A 25 A 20 A 16 A 13 A 10 A 8A 6A

50 000 40 000 30 000

15 000

50 000 40 000 30 000

1 500

63 A 50 A 40 A 32 A 25 A 20 A 16 A 13 A 10 A 8A 6A

50 000 40 000 30 000

I 2t [A2 s]

LPN-..D-1

LPN-..C-1 90 000 70 000

800 900 1 000

LPN-..B-1 90 000 70 000


LST

Minia

Miniature circuit breakers

MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS LST UP TO 125 A (10 kA) „For building, commercial and industrial installations

„Possibility of sealing in on or off position. „N-pole of circuit breakers LST-...-3N contains neither

up to 125 A 230/400 V a.c. and 440 V d.c. „For protection of cables and conductors against overload and short-circuit. „Tripping characteristics B, C, D according to EN 60898-1. „Wide range of accessories – auxiliary switches, undervoltage releases and shunt trips, interconnecting busbars etc. „Breaking capacity Icn 10 kA – to achieve higher Icn (up to 120 kA) it is recommended to use cylindrical fuse-links PV in fuse switch-disconnectors .

thermal nor short-circuit release, in switching on it closes before and in switching off it opens after the other poles. „For circuit breakers LST-DC-... device polarity must be always observed in connecting. „Possibility to connect LST with pin interconnecting busbars spacing 27 mm.

Miniature circuit breakers, 1-pole In

Characteristic B

[A] Type 40 50 63 80 100 125

LST-40B-1 LST-50B-1 LST-63B-1 LST-80B-1 LST-100B-1 LST-125B-1

Characteristic C Product code 37440 37441 37442 37214 37215 37216

Type LST-40C-1 LST-50C-1 LST-63C-1 LST-80C-1 LST-100C-1 LST-125C-1

Characteristic D Product code 37443 37444 37445 37217 37218 37219

Type LST-40D-1 LST-50D-1 LST-63D-1 LST-80D-1 LST-100D-1 LST-125D-1

Product code 37446 37447 37448 37220 37221 37222

Number of modules

Weight [kg]

Package [pcs]

1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5

0.21 0.21 0.21 0.21 0.21 0.21

3 3 3 3 3 3

Number of modules

Weight [kg]

Package [pcs]

4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5

0.66 0.66 0.66 0.66 0.66 0.66

1 1 1 1 1 1

Number of modules

Weight [kg]

Package [pcs]

6 6 6 6 6 6

0.84 0.84 0.84 0.84 0.84 0.84

1 1 1 1 1 1

Miniature circuit breakers, 3-pole In

Characteristic B

[A] Type 40 50 63 80 100 125

LST-40B-3 LST-50B-3 LST-63B-3 LST-80B-3 LST-100B-3 LST-125B-3

Characteristic C Product code 37449 37450 37451 37223 37224 37225

Type LST-40C-3 LST-50C-3 LST-63C-3 LST-80C-3 LST-100C-3 LST-125C-3

Characteristic D Product code 37452 37453 37454 37226 37227 37228

Type LST-40D-3 LST-50D-3 LST-63D-3 LST-80D-3 LST-100D-3 LST-125D-3

Product code 37455 37456 37457 37229 37230 37231

Miniature circuit breakers, 3+N-pole In

Characteristic B

[A] Type 40 50 63 80 100 125

LST-40B-3N LST-50B-3N LST-63B-3N LST-80B-3N LST-100B-3N LST-125B-3N

Characteristic C Product code 37458 37459 37460 37232 37233 37234

Type LST-40C-3N LST-50C-3N LST-63C-3N LST-80C-3N LST-100C-3N LST-125C-3N

Characteristic D Product code 37461 37462 37463 37235 37236 37237

Type LST-40D-3N LST-50D-3N LST-63D-3N LST-80D-3N LST-100D-3N LST-125D-3N

Product code 37464 37465 37466 37238 37239 37240

DC miniature circuit breakers, 2-pole In

Characteristic C

[A]

Type

80 100 125

LST-DC-80C-2 LST-DC-100C-2 LST-DC-125C-2

Product code 37241 37242 37243

Number of modules

Weight [kg]

Package [pcs]

3 3 3

0.45 0.45 0.45

2 2 2

Accessories Auxiliary switches Shunt trips Undervoltage releases Interconnecting busbars Terminal extensions

PS-LS-.. SV-LS-.. SP-LS-.. S1L-27-.., S3L-27-.., S4L-27-.. AS-50-S-AL01, CS-FH000-.., N3x10-FH000

page B19 page B22 page B25 page E52 page E57

B15


Minia

LST

Miniature circuit breakers

MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS LST UP TO 125 A (10 kA) Description NOTICEABLE CONTACT STATE INDICATOR

„ Test push-button for check of the tripping mechanism

„Unambiguously define the state of the circuit breaker. Lever down

function.

Lever up

NON-INTERCHANGEABILITY OF RATED CURRENT „Non-removable coloured sign according to the rated cu-

rrent of the circuit breaker. Target colours correspond with the colours of the threaded fuse-links. SWITCHED OFF

SWITCHED ON

In [A] 40 50 63 80 100 125

„ „ „ „ „ „

Colour black white copper silver red yellow

„Printing on circuit breaker is made by a laser - it is indelible.

Specifications Type

LST

LST-DC

Standards Approval marks

EN 60898-1

EN 60898-1

Number of poles Tripping characteristics Rated current Rated operating voltage Max. operating voltage Min. operating voltage Rated frequency Rated short-circuit breaking capacity (EN 60898) Rated short-circuit ultimate breaking capacity (EN 60947-2) Rated short-circuit service breaking capacity (EN 60947-2) mechanical Endurance electrical

1, 3, 3+N B, C, D 40 ÷ 125 A 230/400 V a.c. / 48 V d.c. 253/440 V a.c. / 52 V d.c. 12 V a.c. / d.c. 40 ÷ 60 Hz 10 kA 10 000 operating cycles 4 000 operating cycles 6 kV IV TH 35 IP20 1.5 ÷ 50 mm2, 2x16 mm2 3.5 Nm yes -30 ÷ +55 °C arbitrary IEC 980:1993 3)

2 C 80, 100, 125 A 440 V d.c. 484 V d.c. 12 V d.c. 10 kA (τ ≤ 5 ms) 100 % Icu 10 000 operating cycles 4 000 operating cycles 6 kV IV TH 35 IP20 1.5 ÷ 50 mm2, 2x16 mm2 3.5 Nm yes 2) -30 ÷ +55 °C arbitrary IEC 980:1993 3)

Rated impulse withstand voltage (1.2/50 μs) Overvoltage category (IEC 664-1) Mounting on “U” rail according to EN - type Degree of protection Connection

Operating conditions

1) 2) 3)

In Ue Umax Umin fn Icn Icu Ics

Uimp

conductor Cu - rigid (solid, stranded), flexible torque top or bottom connection ambient temperature working position seismic resistance

1) 1)

Single-pole connection / two-pole connection It is necessary to keep the polarity marked on the circuit breaker in d.c. circuits It passed the seismic tests for NPP Dukovany and Temelín

Internal impedance Z, powers losses P, impedance Zs In [A]

Z 1) [mΩ/pole]

P 1) [VA/pole]

Max. impedance of fault loop Zs [Ω] 2) characteristic B

40 2.31 3.69 1.16 50 1.73 4.32 0.93 63 1.42 5.63 0.73 80 0.91 5.79 0.57 100 0.80 8.03 0.46 125 0.61 9.46 0.36 1) Average values per pole protected 2) For TN network, U = 230 V, break time up to 0.4 s; if the measured value exceeds the table value, use residual current circuit breaker.

B16

characteristic C

characteristic D

0.64 0.51 0.40 0.32 0.26 0.20

0.36 0.28 0.23 0.18 0.14 0.11


LST

Minia

Miniature circuit breakers

MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS LST UP TO 125 A (10 kA) Correction of rated currents of miniature circuit breakers LST Correction of rated currents for ambient temperature -30 °C up to +60 °C [A] 1)

In [A]

-30 °C -20 °C -10 °C 0 °C

10 °C

20 °C

30 °C

40 52.0 50.0 48.0 48.0 46.0 44.0 40 50 65.0 62.5 60.0 60.0 57.5 55.0 50 63 81.9 78.8 75.6 75.6 72.5 69.3 63 80 104.0 104.0 100.0 96.0 92.0 88.0 80 100 130.0 130.0 125.0 120.0 115.0 110.0 100 125 162.5 162.5 156.3 150.0 143.8 137.5 125 1) Valid for 1 pole and any characteristic, reference temperature 30 °C

Correction of rated currents of miniature circuit breakers installed side by side [A] 2)

40 °C

50 °C

60 °C

37.2 46.5 58.6 74.4 93.0 116.3

35.2 44.0 55.4 70.4 88.0 110.0

33.6 42.0 52.9 67.2 84.0 105.0

1

2

40 38.00 50 47.50 63 59.85 80 76.00 100 95.00 125 118.75 2) Valid for reference temperature 30 °C

3

4

5

37.00 46.25 58.28 74.00 92.50 115.63

36.00 45.00 56.70 72.00 90.00 112.50

35.20 44.00 55.44 70.40 88.00 110.00

Dimensions LST-..-1

LST-DC-..-2

LST-..-3

LST-..-3N

45 1.7

90

71.5

26.6

53.2

79.8

106.4

5.5

44 60 70 74

Diagram LST-..1

LST-..3

LST-..-3N

LST-DC-..-2

1

1

3

5

1

3

5

N1

1

3

2

2

4

6

2

4

6

N2

2

4

2-pole connection LST-DC Top connection

Protection of DC circuits

Bottom connection

Source

For protection of d.c. circuits it is possible to use LST circuit breakers and LST-DC circuit breakers depending on voltage.

440 V / L+ I

Load 0 V / L-

I I

I

Protection of DC circuits

LST-...-1  LST-DC-...-2 1)  1) It is necessary to keep the polarity marked on the circuit breaker  Possible to use

≤ 440 V d.c. -



Correct polarity connection of DC circuit breakers, see page B13

LST-DC-...-2

≤ 48 V d.c.

LST-DC-...-2

Rated voltage Ue

Type of miniature circuit breaker

I

I I

I 0 V / L-

Load

440 V / L+ Source

B17


Minia

LST

Miniature circuit breakers

MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS LST UP TO 125 A (10 kA) Characteristics „Characteristic B: for protection of line of electrical circuits with equipment, which does not cause 1.45 In

1.13 In

current surges (lighting and socket circuits etc.). The short-circuit release is set to (3 ÷ 5) In . „Characteristic C: for protection of line of electrical circuits with equipment, which causes current

At ambient temperature +30°C

10 000

surges (light bulb groups, motors etc.). The short-circuit release is set to (6 ÷ 9) In .

120 5 000 60

„Characteristic D: for protection of line of electrical circuits with equipment, which causes high

min.

30

current surges (transformers, 2-pole motors etc.). The short-circuit release is set to (12 ÷ 16) In .

1 000 10

500

5 2 1

Tripping characteristics of circuit breakers according to EN 60898-1 100

Tripping characteristic type B, C, D

Thermal release

50

Conventional non-tripping current Int for t ≥ 1 h ( for In ≤ 63 A) Int for t ≥ 2 h ( for In > 63 A) Conventional tripping current It for t < 1 h ( for In ≤ 63 A) It for t < 2 h ( for In > 63 A) Current I3 for 1 s < t < 60 s ( for In ≤ 32 A) 1 s < t < 120 s ( for In > 32 A) t - break time of the circuit breaker

10

tv [s]

5

1 0.5

B

0.1

C

D

Current I4 for

0.1 s < t < 45 s ( for In ≤ 32 A) 0.1 s < t < 90 s ( for In > 32 A) 0.1 s < t < 15 s ( for In ≤ 32 A) 0.1 s < t < 30 s ( for In > 32 A) 0.1 s < t < 4 s 1) ( for In ≤ 32 A) 0.1 s < t < 8 s ( for In > 32 A) Current I5 for t < 0.1s

0.01

0.002 0.001 1

2

3

4

B

6

8 10

C

20

30

40

60

80

D

It = 1.45 In I3 = 2.55 In

Tripping characteristic type B C

Electromagnetic release

0.006

Int = 1.13 In

D

I 4 = 3 In I 4 = 5 In I4 = 10 In I5 = 5 In

I5 = 10 In

I5 = 20 In

1)

for In ≤ 10 A it is permissible that t < 8 s t - break time of the circuit breaker

x In

Characteristics I2t

125 A 100 A 80 A 63 A 50 A

100 000 70 000

50 000 40 000 30 000

50 000 40 000 30 000

50 000 40 000 30 000

20 000 15 000

20 000 15 000

20 000 15 000 10 000

I p [A]

B18

15 000

20 000

5 000 6 000 7 000 8 000 9 000 10 000

3 000

I p [A]

4 000

1 500

2 000

1 000

800 900 1 000

1 000

20 000

1 000

15 000

2 000 1 500

5 000 6 000 7 000 8 000 9 000 10 000

2 000 1 500

3 000

2 000 1 500

4 000

5 000 4 000 3 000

1 500

5 000 4 000 3 000

2 000

7 000

5 000 4 000 3 000

800 900 1 000

7 000

I p [A]

20 000

10 000

7 000

15 000

I 2t [A2 s]

70 000

I 2t [A2 s]

70 000

10 000

100 A 80 A 63 A 50 A 40 A

200 000 150 000

40 A

100 000

125 A

5 000 6 000 7 000 8 000 9 000 10 000

200 000 150 000

LST-..D-..

3 000

100 000

500 000 400 000 300 000

4 000

100 A 80 A 63 A 50 A 40 A

LST-..C-..

1 500

125 A

200 000 150 000

I 2t [A2 s]

500 000 400 000 300 000

2 000

LST-..B-..

800 900 1 000

500 000 400 000 300 000


Minia

Miniature circuit breakers

AUXILIARY AND RELATIVE SWITCHES Auxiliary and relative switches PS-LP „Accessories to: LPE, LPN, APN. „Auxiliary and relative switches are designed for signalling the position of the main contacts of circuit breakers LPE, LPN and tumbler power switches APN in tripping: „ by releases or manually – i.e. in switching off by overload, short-circuit, shunt trip or undervoltage release and control lever. It is possible to use contacts with this function (auxiliary contact) to set switch SEL to position „A+A“ (resp. „A“ for switching contact) „ only by releases – i.e. only in tripping by shortcircuit, overload, shunt trip or undervoltage release. It is possible to use one contact with this function (relative contact) to set switch SEL to position „A+R“ (resp. „R“ for switching contact).

„Selection of auxiliary/relative contact function is perfor-

med by the rotary switch SEL on the side of the device. „2 auxiliary and relative switches can be connected to one

miniature circuit breakers (tumbler power switch). „They are suitable for application in SELV and PELV

circuits – sufficient insulation is provided between the circuit breaker (power tumbler switch) and auxiliary and relative switches.

Arrangement of contacts 1) - position of switch SEL Type Product Number Weight code of modules [kg] A+A 2) A+R 2) A 11 A 10 + R 10 PS-LP-110S 34260 0.5 0.05 3) A 11 A 10 + R 10 PS-LP-110S-Au 34261 0.5 0.05 A 11 A 01 + R 01 PS-LP-110S-Y 34262 0.5 0.05 A 20 A 10 + R 01 PS-LP-200S 34263 0.5 0.05 A 02 A 01 + R 10 PS-LP-020S 34264 0.5 0.05 A 001 R 001 PS-LP-001S 34265 0.5 0.045 1) Each digit indicates successively the number of make, break and break-make contacts 2) Position A+A = contacts function in „auxiliary“ mode; position A+R = one contact is switched to „relative“ mode“ The choice of mode is done by rotary switch SEL on the side of the auxiliary switch 3) Gold-plated contacts – suitable for switching of low output loads

Auxiliary switches PS-LS „Accessories to: LST, AST. „Can be used also with formerly produced types of circuit breakers LSE, LSN. „Auxiliary switches are used for position signalling of main contacts of circuit breaker LST and tumbler power switches AST in switching off by releases or manually – i.e. in switching off by overload, short-circuit, shunt trip or undervoltage release and control lever.

Package [pcs] 1 1 1 1 1 1

„They are suitable for application in SELV and PELV

circuits – sufficient insulation is provided between the circuit breaker (power tumbler switch) and auxiliary and relative switches.

Arrangement Type Product Number of contacts 1) code of modules 11 PS-LS-1100 35664 0.5 11 PS-LS-1100-Au 2) 35665 0.5 21 PS-LS-2100 35666 0.5 21 PS-LS-2100-Au 2) 35667 0.5 1) Each digit indicates successively the number of make and break contacts 2) Gold-plated contacts – suitable for switching of low output loads

Weight [kg] 0.043 0.043 0.049 0.049

Package [pcs] 1 1 1 1

B19


Minia

Miniature circuit breakers

AUXILIARY AND RELATIVE SWITCHES Specifications Type

PS-LP-..

PS-LS-..

Standards Approval marks

EN 60947-5-1, EN 62019

EN 60947-5-1

Arrangement of contacts 1) 2)

A11/A10+R10, A11/A01+R01, A20/A10+R01, A02/A01+R10, A001/R001 230 V a.c. / 6 A 230 V a.c. / 4 A or 400 V a.c. / 2 230 V a.c. / 3 A 220 V d.c. / 0.55 A 4 kV 20 000 operating cycles 4 000 operating cycles on the right side of the device IP20

11, 21 230 V a.c. / 6 A 230 V a.c. / 4 A or 400 V a.c. / 2 A 220 V d.c. / 1 A 4 kV 10 000 operating cycles 4 000 operating cycles on the right side of the device IP20

0.75 ÷ 4 mm2 0.75 ÷ 2.5 mm2 0.8 Nm yes

0.75 ÷ 4 mm2 0.75 ÷ 2.5 mm2 0.8 Nm yes

-30 ÷ 55 °C arbitrary IEC 980:1993

-30 ÷ 55 °C arbitrary IEC 980:1993

Ue / Ie

Rated operating voltage / current

AC-12 AC-13 AC-15 DC-13

Rated impulse withstand voltage (1.2/50 μs) Uimp Mechanical endurance Electrical endurance Mounting Degree of protection Connection Conductor rigid (solid, stranded) Conductor flexible Torque Top or bottom connection Operating conditions Ambient temperature Working position Seismic resistance 1) Each digit indicates successively the number of make, break and break-make contacts 2) A=auxiliary contact, R=relative contact 3) It passed the seismic tests for NPP Dukovany and Temelín

3)

3)

Dimensions PS-LP-110S PS-LP-110S-.. PS-LP-200S PS-LP-020S

PS-LP-001S

12.75

12.75

PS-LS-..

60

64.2

33 23

12 94

12 14 11 13

21 23 91 93

11 91

22 24 92 94

14 92

8.75

45

90

93

86

45

11

12 24 34

8.75

44 8.75

72

5.5

44 70

Diagram Change-over switch SEL in position A+A

PS-LP-110S PS-LP-110S-Au

PS-LP-110S-Y

PS-LP-200S

SEL

SEL

SEL

A+A

A+A

PS-LP-020S

A+A

SEL

PS-LP-001S

A+A

SEL

14

22

12

24

14

24

12

22

13

21

11

23

13

23

11

21

A 12

14

SEL

A+A

B20

A+R

11


Minia

Miniature circuit breakers

AUXILIARY AND RELATIVE SWITCHES Diagram Change-over switch SEL in position A+R

PS-LP-110S PS-LP-110S-Au

PS-LP-110S-Y

PS-LP-200S

SEL

SEL

SEL

A+R

A+R

PS-LP-020S

A+R

SEL

PS-LP-001S

A+R

SEL

14

94

12

92

14

92

12

94

13

93

11

91

13

91

11

93

R 92

94

SEL

A+A

A+R

PS-LS-1100

91

PS-LS-2100

33

11

33

23

11

34

12

34

24

12

Installation of auxiliary switch on miniature circuit breaker (tumbler switch) PS-LP-.. 1. At mounting the levers of auxiliary switch and of the device are in OFF position. 2. Insert the lower fastening catch in the device recess. 3. Press the auxiliary switch to the device so that the upper fastening latch of the auxiliary switch snaps in the device recess. 4. Check correct function by switching.

PS-LS-.. 1. At mounting the levers of auxiliary switch and of the device are in ON position. 2. From the right slide the longer shaft in the control lever of the device and shorter one in the hole of the switching system of the device 3. From the right slide the auxiliary switch on the device so that one shaft interconnects control levers and the other the switching systems. 4. Press the auxiliary switch to the device and snap the side fastening clamps of the auxiliary switch in the device recess. 5. Check correct function by switching.

3 9.8

-LS

1

ON

1 OFF

2

PS-LP max 2x

PS LST, AST

13.5

LPN LPE APN

OFF

ON

2

B21


Minia

Miniature circuit breakers

SHUNT TRIPS Shunt trips SV-LP „Accessories to: LPE, LPN, APN. „For tripping the circuit breaker LPE, LPN and tumbler power switch APN by applied voltage.

Rated voltage Uc 12 ÷ 60 V a.c. / d.c. 110 ÷ 415 V a.c. / 110 ÷ 220 V d.c.

Type SV-LP-X060 SV-LP-X400

Product code 34325 34326

Shunt trips SV-LS „Accessories to: LST, AST. „Can be used also with formerly produced types of circuit breakers LSE, LSN. „For tripping the circuit breaker LST and tumbler power switch AST by applied voltage between 70 % and 110 % Uc . Rated voltage Uc 24 V a.c. / d.c.

„It contains auxiliary make contact, which can be used

for position signalling of the main contacts of circuit breaker LPE, LPN and tumbler power switch APN.

Number of modules 1 1

Package [pcs] 1 1

„It contains make contact (version SV-LS-....-1010 make

and break), which can be used for position signalling of the main contacts of circuit breaker LST and tumbler power switch AST.

Arrangement Type Product of contacts 1) code 10 SV-LS-X024-1000 35695 101 SV-LS-X024-1010 35696 48 V a.c. / d.c. 10 SV-LS-X048-1000 35697 101 SV-LS-X048-1010 35698 110 V a.c. / d.c. 10 SV-LS-X110-1000 35699 101 SV-LS-X110-1010 35700 230 V a.c. / 220 V d.c. 10 SV-LS-X230-1000 35701 101 SV-LS-X230-1010 35702 400 V a.c. / 440 V d.c. 10 SV-LS-X400-1000 35703 101 SV-LS-X400-1010 35704 1) Each digit indicates successively the number of make, break and break-make contacts

B22

Weight [kg] 0.125 0.125

Number of modules 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Weight [kg] 0.12 0.12 0.12 0.12 0.12 0.12 0.12 0.12 0.12 0.12

Package [pcs] 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1


Minia

Miniature circuit breakers

SHUNT TRIPS Specifications Type

SV-LP-..

SV-LS-..

Standards Approval marks

EN 60947-1

EN 60947-1

Mounting Degree of protection Control circuit (coil) Rated voltage

on the left side of the device IP20

on the left side of the device IP20

12 ÷ 60 V a.c. / d.c. 110 ÷ 415 V a.c. / 110 ÷ 220 V d.c. 40 ÷ 60 Hz max. 15 ms

24, 48, 110, 230, 400 V a.c. 24, 48, 110, 220, 440 V d.c. 40 ÷ 60 Hz 10 ms

10 230 V a.c. / 4 A or 400 V a.c. / 2 A 230 V a.c. / 2 A 220 V d.c. / 0.5 A 20 000 operating cycles 4 000 operating cycles

10, 101 230 V a.c. / 4 A or 400 V a.c. / 2 A 230 V a.c. / 2 A 220 V d.c. / 0.5 A 10 000 operating cycles 4 000 operating cycles

0.75 ÷ 4 mm2 0.75 ÷ 2.5 mm2 0.8 Nm yes

0.75 ÷ 4 mm2 0.75 ÷ 2.5 mm2 0.8 Nm yes

-30 ÷ 55 °C arbitrary IEC 980:1993

-30 ÷ 55 °C arbitrary IEC 980:1993

Uc

Rated frequency Break time Contact Arrangement of contacts 1) Rated operating voltage / current

fn

Ue / Ie

AC-1 AC-15 DC-1

Mechanical endurance Electrical endurance Connection Conductor – rigid (solid, stranded) Conductor – flexible Torque Top or bottom connection Operating conditions Ambient temperature Working position Seismic resistance 1) Each digit indicates successively the number of make, break and break-make contacts 2) It passed the seismic tests for NPP Dukovany and Temelín

2)

2)

Dimensions SV-LP-..

SV-LS-.. 64.2

21.45

C1

26.1

71.5

C2

24 22 21

C2 C1 14 17.5

45

90

86

45

14

44

17.5

5.5

72

44 60 70

Diagram SV-LP-.. C1

SV-LS-..-1000 C2

14

C1

SV-LS-..-1010 C2

14

C1

C2

14

22

24

21

B23


Minia

Miniature circuit breakers

SHUNT TRIPS Installation of shunt trip on circuit breaker (tumbler switch) SV-LS-.. 1. At mounting the levers of the shunt trip and of the device are in OFF position. 2. From the right slide the longer shaft in the control lever of the shunt trip and shorter one in the hole of the switching system of the shunt trip. 3. From the right slide the device on the shunt trip so that one shaft interconnects control levers and the other the switching systems. 4. Press the device to the shunt trip and snap the side fastening clamps of the shunt trip in the device recess. 5. Check correct function by switching.

9.8

SV-LP-.. 1. At mounting the levers of the shunt trip and of the device are in OFF position. 2. Insert the lower fastening catch in the device recess. 3. Press the shunt trip to the device so that the upper fastening latch of the shunt trip snaps in the device recess. 4. Check correct function by switching.

13.5

3

1 1

OFF OFF

OFF 2 2

B24

ST T, A LS

OFF

SV-LS


Minia

Miniature circuit breakers

UNDERVOLTAGE RELEASES Undervoltage releases SP-LP „Accessories to: LPE, LPN, APN. „For tripping the circuit breaker LPE, LPN and tumbler power switch APN at loss of voltage as well as at gradual decrease of voltage between 70 % and 35 % Uc .

Rated voltage Delay Type Uc 24 V a.c. SP-LP-A024 48 V a.c. SP-LP-A048 110 V a.c. SP-LP-A110 230 V a.c. SP-LP-A230 230 V a.c. 0.4 s SP-LP-A230-T004 400 V a.c. SP-LP-A400 SP-LP-D024-Y004 24 V d.c. 0 s or 0.2 s 1) 1) SP-LP-D048-Y004 48 V d.c. 0 s or 0.2 s 110 V d.c. 0 s or 0.2 s 1) SP-LP-D110-Y004 SP-LP-D220-Y004 220 V d.c. 0 s or 0.2 s 1) 400 V d.c. 0 s or 0.2 s 1) SP-LP-D400-Y004 1) Delay is activated by interconnection of terminals 1, 2

Undervoltage releases SP-LS „Accessories to: LST, AST. „Can be used also with formerly produced types of circuit breakers LSE, LSN. „For tripping the circuit breaker LST and tumbler power switch AST at loss of voltage as well as at gradual decrease of voltage between 70 % and 35 % Uc . „For elimination of circuit breaker LST and tumbler power switch AST, if voltage is lower than 35 % Uc (switching is possible at voltage higher than 85 % Uc). Rated voltage Uc 24 V a.c.

„For elimination of closing of circuit breaker LPE, LPN and

tumbler power switch APN, if voltage is lower than 35 % Uc (switching is possible at voltage higher than 85 % Uc). „They are often used for protection against device restart following power blackout. „Design with 0.2 s, resp. 0.4 s delay for prevention of unwanted tripping at short-time power blackout.

Product code 34327 34328 34329 34330 34331 34332 34333 34334 34335 34336 34337

Number of modules 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Weight [kg] 0.125 0.125 0.130 0.125 0.130 0.130 0.130 0.130 0.130 0.125 0.125

Package [pcs] 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

„They are often used for protection against device restart

following power blackout. „Undervoltage releases SP-LS-....-1010 contain in addi-

tion an auxiliary switch with make and break-make contact for position signalling of the main contacts of circuit breaker LST or tumbler power switch AST.

Arrangement Type Product Number of contacts 1) code of modules SP-LS-A024 35944 1 101 SP-LS-A024-1010 35945 1 48 V a.c. SP-LS-A048 35946 1 101 SP-LS-A048-1010 35947 1 110 V a.c. SP-LS-A110 35948 1 101 SP-LS-A110-1010 35949 1 230 V a.c. SP-LS-A230 35950 1 101 SP-LS-A230-1010 35951 1 400 V a.c. SP-LS-A400 35952 1 101 SP-LS-A400-1010 35953 1 1) Each digit indicates successively the number of make, break and break-make contacts

Weight [kg] 0.12 0.12 0.12 0.12 0.12 0.12 0.12 0.12 0.12 0.12

Package [pcs] 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

B25


Minia

Miniature circuit breakers

UNDERVOLTAGE RELEASES Specifications Type

SP-LP-..

SP-LS-..

Standards Approval marks

EN 60947-1

EN 60947-1

Mounting Degree of protection Control circuit (coil) Rated voltage

on the left side of the device IP20

on the left side of the device IP20

24, 48, 110, 230, 400 V a.c. 24, 48, 110, 220, 400 V d.c. 2.6 W 40 ÷ 60 Hz max. 45 ms 2)

24, 48, 110, 230, 400 V a.c. 2.5 W 40 ÷ 60 Hz 25 ms

-

10, 101 230 V a.c. / 4 A or 400 V a.c. / 2 A 230 V a.c. / 2 A 220 V d.c. / 0,5 A 10 000 operating cycles 4 000 operating cycles

0.75 ÷ 4 mm2 0.75 ÷ 2.5 mm2 0.8 Nm yes

0.75 ÷ 4 mm2 0.75 ÷ 2.5 mm2 0.8 Nm yes

-30 ÷ 55 °C arbitrary IEC 980:1993

-30 ÷ 55 °C arbitrary IEC 980:1993

Uc

Consumption Rated frequency Break time Contact Arrangement of contacts 1) Rated operating voltage / current

fn

Ue / Ie

AC-1 AC-15 DC-1

Mechanical endurance Electrical endurance Connection Conductor rigid (solid, stranded) Conductor flexible Torque Top or bottom connection Operating conditions Ambient temperature Working position Seismic resistance 1) Each digit indicates successively the number of make, break and break-make contacts 2) The stated time is valid for undelayed undervoltage releases 3) It passed the seismic tests for NPP Dukovany and Temelín

3)

3)

Dimensions SP-LP-..

SP-LS-.. 64.2

24 22 21

13 D1 D2 17.5

44

45

2

71.5

90

D2

1

86

D1

26.1

45

21.45

17.5

5.5

72

44 60 70

Diagram SP-LP-A.. D1

U<

D2

SP-LS-D.. D1

1

U<

D2

2

SP-LS-

SP-LS-..-1010

D1

D1

U<

U<

13

24

D2 D2

B26

22

21


Minia

Miniature circuit breakers

UNDERVOLTAGE RELEASES Installation of undervoltage release on circuit breaker (tumbler switch) SP-LS-.. 1. At mounting the levers of undervoltage release and of the device are in OFF position. 2. From the right slide the longer shaft in the control lever undervoltage releases and shorter one in the hole of the switching system of the undervoltage release. 3. From the right slide the device on the undervoltage release so that one shaft interconnects control levers and the other the switching systems. 4. Press the device to the undervoltage release and snap the side fastening latches of the undervoltage release in the device recess. 5. Check correct function by switching.

9.8

SP-LP-.. 1. At mounting the levers of undervoltage release and of the device are in OFF position. 2. Insert the lower fastening catch in the device recess. 3. Press the undervoltage release to the device so that the upper fastening latch of the undervoltage release snaps in the device recess. 4. Check correct function by switching.

13.5

3

ST T, A LS

OFF

SP-LS

1 1

OFF OFF

OFF 2 2

B27


Minia

OD-LP-VU01

Miniature circuit breakers

LOCKING INSERT „Accessories to: LPE, LPN, APN. „For safe locking of the control lever in off or on position. „The protective function of the circuit breaker is

„Maximum diameter of lock rod – 5 mm. „The lock is not included in the package.

functional even in locked position.

Type

Product code 37287

OD-LP-VU01

Weight [kg] 0.003

Dimensions OD-LP-VU01

17.5

64.2

10.5

Mounting of locking insert on the circuit breaker (tumbler switch) 1

4

B28

2

Position switched of

3

Position switched on

Package [pcs] 1


OD-LP-VP01

Minia

Miniature circuit breakers

SEALING INSERT „Accessories to: LPE, LPN, APN. „For covering and sealing of terminal screws.

Type

Product code 37289

OD-LP-VP01

Weight [kg] 0.004

Package [pcs] 1

Mounting of sealing insert on the circuit breaker (tumbler switch) 1

2

3

B29


Minia

OD-LP-MP01

Miniature circuit breakers

INSULATING BARRIERS „Accessories to: LPE, LPN, APN. „For additional increase of surface distances between

individual poles of the circuit breaker LPE, LPN or tumbler power switch APN. „1 set contains 3 pieces.

Type

Product code 37288

OD-LP-MP01

Weight [kg] 0.002

Dimensions OD-LP-MP01 43.8

15

21.2

1

Mounting of insulation barrier on the circuit breaker (tumbler switch)

B30

Package [number of sets] 1


Minia

‰Residual current circuit breakers with overcurrent

protection OLE (6 kA)..................................................................................................................C2 ‰Residual current circuit breakers with overcurrent protection OLI (10 kA).................................................................................................................C6 ‰Accessories for OLE, OLI........................................................................................................... C12 ‰Residual current circuit breakers OFE (6 kA)...............................................................C14 ‰Residual current circuit breakers OFI (10 kA)..............................................................C17 ‰Accessories for OFE, OFI............................................................................................................C22 ‰Basic terms, symbols and break times...........................................................................C24

RESIDUAL CURRENT CIRCUIT BREAKERS

C


Minia

OLE

Residual current circuit breakers

RESIDUAL CURRENT CIRCUIT BREAKERS WITH OVERCURRENT PROTECTION OLE (6 kA) „The device is a combination of residual current circuit

breaker and circuit breaker. „For building, housing and similar installations up to 16 A, 230 V a.c. „For protection: – against dangerous contact with live parts (IΔn ≤ 30 mA) – against dangerous contact with dead parts – against fire – against overload – against short-circuit (breaking capacity Icn = 6 kA)

„Tripping characteristics B, C according to EN 61009-1. „Possibility of additional mounting of auxiliary switch

PS-LV-1100 on the right side of the device.

6 000 3

Residual current circuit breakers with overcurrent protection, type AC „ They react to sine-wave residual current (type AC). IΔn In Characteristic B Product [mA] [A] Type code 6 OLE-6B-1N-030AC 38313 10 OLE-10B-1N-030AC 38314 30 16 OLE-16B-1N-030AC 38315

Characteristic C Type OLE-6C-1N-030AC OLE-10C-1N-030AC OLE-16C-1N-030AC

Product code 38320 38321 38322

Number of modules

Weight [kg]

Package [pcs]

2 2 2

0.25 0.25 0.25

1 1 1

Accessories to OLE Auxiliary switch Interconnecting busbars Terminal extensions

PS-LV-1100-K S2L-... AS-25-S, AS-50-S-AL01

page C12 page E52 page E57

Specifications

C2

Type

OLE

Standards Approval marks

EN 61009-1

Number of poles Tripping characteristics Type Rated current Rated residual current Rated operating voltage Min. operating voltage 1) Max. operating voltage Rated frequency Surge resistance (8/20 μs) Rated short-circuit breaking capacity Rated residual making and breaking capacity Rated impulse withstand voltage (1.2/50 μs) Mechanical endurance Electrical endurance Energy limitation class Degree of protection Mounting on “U” rail according to EN - type Connection Conductor rigid (solid, stranded) Conductor flexible with a sleeve Torque Top or bottom connection Operating conditions Ambient temperature Working position 1) For preserving the function of the test push-button 2) For detailed connection of conductors see the table on page C5

2 B, C AC 6 ÷ 16 A 30 mA 230 V a.c. 100 V a.c. 255 V a.c. 50 ÷ 60 Hz 1 kA 6 kA 6 kA 6 kV 10 000 operating cycles 10 000 operating cycles 3 IP20 TH 35

In IΔn Ue Umin Umax fn Icn IΔm Uimp

0.75 ÷ 35 mm2 0.75 ÷ 25 mm2 2.5÷ 3 Nm yes -5 ÷ 40 °C arbitrary

2) 2)


OLE

Residual current circuit breakers

Minia

RESIDUAL CURRENT CIRCUIT BREAKERS WITH OVERCURRENT PROTECTION OLE (6 kA) Internal impedance Z and powers losses P In [A] 6 10 16

L-Pole Z [mΩ] 72 15.4 9.6

Correction of rated currents

Characteristic B N-Pole Power loss Z [mΩ] P [W] 2.1 2.7 2.1 1.8 2.1 3

L-Pole Z [mΩ] 52 13.4 8.7

Characteristic C N-Pole Power loss Z [mΩ] P [W] 2.1 1.9 2.1 1.6 2.1 2.8

Correction of rated currents for ambient temperature -10 °C up to + 40 °C [A] 2) In [A] -10 °C 0 °C 10 °C 20 °C 30 °C 40 °C 6 6.8 6.7 6.4 6.2 6 5.7 10 11.4 11.2 10.7 10.4 10 9.5 16 18.2 17.9 17.1 16.6 16 15.2 2) Reference temperature: 30 °C

Dimensions OLE

36

7

90

45

90

73.3

44 64 70

Diagram

OLE 1

N

2

N

C3


Minia

OLE

Residual current circuit breakers

RESIDUAL CURRENT CIRCUIT BREAKERS WITH OVERCURRENT PROTECTION OLE (6 kA) Characteristics 1.13 In 1.45 In

„Characteristic B: for protection of line of electrical circuits with equipment, which does not cause At ambient temperature +30 °C

10 000 120

current surges (lighting and socket circuits etc.). The short-circuit release is set to (3 ÷ 5) In .

5 000

„Characteristic C: for protection of line of electrical circuits with equipment, which causes current

60

min.

30

surges (light bulb groups, motors etc.). The short-circuit release is set to (6 ÷ 9) In .

1 000 10

500

5 2

100

1

50

Tripping characteristics of circuit breakers according to EN 61009-1 Tripping characteristic type B, C Int = 1.13 In It = 1.45 In

Thermal release Conventional non-tripping current Int for t ≥ 1 h Conventional tripping current It for t < 1 h Current I3 for 1 s < t < 60 s and In ≤ 32 A 1 s < t < 120 s and In > 32 A t - break time of the circuit breaker

10 tv [s]

5

1 0.5

B

0.1

C

Tripping characteristic type B C

Electromagnetic release Current I4 for

0.002

0.1 s < t < 45 s 0.1 s < t < 90 s 0.1 s < t < 15 s 0.1 s < t < 30 s Current I5 for t < 0.1 s

0.001

t - break time of the circuit breaker

0.01 0.006

1

2

3

I3 = 2.55 In

4

6 8 10

B

C

20

30 40

(for In ≤ 32 A) (for In > 32 A) (for In ≤ 32 A) (for In > 32 A)

I4 = 3 In I4 = 5 In I5 = 5 In

I5 = 10 In

60 80 x In

Characteristics I2t

50 000 40 000 30 000

50 000 40 000 30 000

10 A

20 000 15 000

10 000

6A

10 000 5 000 4 000 3 000

2 000 1 500

2 000 1 500

I p [A]

15 000

10 000

5 000 6 000

4 000

3 000

20

15 000

20

10 000

50 40 30

4 000

70

50 40 30

5 000 6 000

100

70

3 000

100

2 000

200 150

1 500

200 150

2 000

700 500 400 300

800 900 1 000

C4

6A

1 000

500 400 300

I p [A]

10 A

1 500

700

I 2t [A2 s]

7 000

5 000 4 000 3 000

t

7 000

16 A

800 900 1 000

16 A

20 000 15 000

1 000

I2

OLE-..C-.. 90 000 70 000

[A2

s]

OLE-..B-.. 90 000 70 000


OLE

Residual current circuit breakers

Minia

RESIDUAL CURRENT CIRCUIT BREAKERS WITH OVERCURRENT PROTECTION OLE (6 kA) Connection of conductors and interconnecting busbars Terminal system Design: two levels of terminals with a fixed barrier between them. Connection: each level enables connection of both the conductor

and interconnecting busbar (interconnecting busbars with pins, type „S“ – see page E52). This is possible from both sides of the device. For connection range see the table below.

Level 1 Barrier Level 2

Advantages Easy connection and check of conductors at simultaneous

connection of interconnecting busbar – the busbar does not cover the conductor connecting place.

Possibility of connection:

- conductors of various cross-sections - up to 4 conductors in the terminal - conductor of cross-section up to 35 mm2

Connection range

3 conductors

Rigid conductor (solid, stranded) Level 1 Level 2 1x ( ≤ 35 mm2) 1x ( ≤ 25 mm2) * 2x ( ≤ 10 mm2) 2x ( ≤ 6 mm2) 2 1x ( ≤ 10 mm2) 1x ( ≤ 35 mm ) 2 1x ( ≤ 16 mm2) 1x ( ≤ 25 mm ) 1x ( ≤ 16 mm2) 1x ( ≤ 25 mm2) * 1x ( ≤ 35 mm2) 2x ( ≤ 6 mm2)

4 conductors

2x ( ≤ 10 mm2) 2x ( ≤ 10 mm2)

Number of connected conductors 1 conductor 2 conductors

*

1x ( ≤ 25 mm2) * 2x ( ≤ 6 mm2)

Conductor flexible with a sleeve Level 1 Level 2 1x ( ≤ 25 mm2) 1x ( ≤ 16 mm2) 2x ( ≤ 6 mm2) 2x ( ≤ 4 mm2) 2 1x ( ≤ 25 mm ) 1x ( ≤ 6 mm2) 1x ( ≤ 16 mm2) 1x ( ≤ 25 mm2) 1x ( ≤ 16 mm2) 2x ( ≤ 6 mm2) 2x ( ≤ 6 mm2)

1x ( ≤ 16 mm2) 2x ( ≤ 2,5 mm2) 2x ( ≤ 4 mm2) 1x ( ≤ 16 mm2) 2x ( ≤ 4 mm2)

Valid only for stranded conductor, for solid conductor the max cross-section is 16 mm2

C5


Minia

OLI

Residual current circuit breakers

RESIDUAL CURRENT CIRCUIT BREAKERS WITH OVERCURRENT PROTECTION OLI (10 kA) „The device is a combination of residual current circuit

breaker and circuit breaker. „For building, commercial and industrial installations up to 40 A, 230 V a.c. „For protection: – against dangerous contact with live parts (IΔn ≤ 30 mA) – against dangerous contact with dead parts – against fire – against overload – against short-circuit (breaking capacity Icn = 10 kA)

„Tripping characteristics B, C according to EN 61009-1. „Possibility of additional mounting of auxiliary switch

PS-LV-1100 on the right side of the device.

Residual current circuit breakers with overcurrent protection. type AC

10 000 3

„ They react to sine-wave residual current (type AC). IΔn

In

Characteristic B

[mA] [A] Type

30

300

6 OLI-6B-1N-030AC 10 OLI-10B-1N-030AC 16 OLI-16B-1N-030AC 20 OLI-20B-1N-030AC 25 OLI-25B-1N-030AC 32 OLI-32B-1N-030AC 40 OLI-40B-1N-030AC 6 10 16 20 25 32 40 -

Characteristic C Product code 38271 38272 38273 38274 38275 38276 38277 -

Type OLI-6C-1N-030AC OLI-10C-1N-030AC OLI-16C-1N-030AC OLI-20C-1N-030AC OLI-25C-1N-030AC OLI-32C-1N-030AC OLI-40C-1N-030AC OLI-6C-1N-300AC OLI-10C-1N-300AC OLI-16C-1N-300AC OLI-20C-1N-300AC OLI-25C-1N-300AC OLI-32C-1N-300AC OLI-40C-1N-300AC

Product code 38278 38279 38280 38281 38282 38283 38284 38285 38286 38287 38288 38289 38290 38291

Number of modules

Weight [kg]

Package [pcs]

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Residual current circuit breakers with overcurrent protection, type A

10 000 3

„ They react to both sine-wave residual current and pulsating direct residual current (type A). IΔn

In

Characteristic B

[mA] [A] Type

30

300

C6

6 10 16 20 25 32 40 6 10 16 20 25 32 40

OLI-6B-1N-030A OLI-10B-1N-030A OLI-16B-1N-030A OLI-20B-1N-030A OLI-25B-1N-030A OLI-32B-1N-030A OLI-40B-1N-030A -

Characteristic C Product code 38292 38293 38294 38295 38296 38297 38298 -

Type OLI-6C-1N-030A OLI-10C-1N-030A OLI-16C-1N-030A OLI-20C-1N-030A OLI-25C-1N-030A OLI-32C-1N-030A OLI-40C-1N-030A OLI-6C-1N-300A OLI-10C-1N-300A OLI-16C-1N-300A OLI-20C-1N-300A OLI-25C-1N-300A OLI-32C-1N-300A OLI-40C-1N-300A

Product code 38299 38300 38301 38302 38303 38304 38305 38306 38307 38308 38309 38310 38311 38312

-25

Number of modules

Weight [kg]

Package [pcs]

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1


OLI

Minia

Residual current circuit breakers

RESIDUAL CURRENT CIRCUIT BREAKERS WITH OVERCURRENT PROTECTION OLI (10 kA) Residual current circuit breakers with overcurrent protection, type AC-G „They react to sine-wave residual current (type AC). „Special residual current circuit breakers which reduce

„Surge resistance: 3 kA (8/20 μs). „Release delay: 10 ms.

the number of undesirable releases. „It is recommended to install them before the equipment

causing short-time (up to 10 ms) stray currents – heavy induction motors, large heating bodies, interference suppressors, surge voltage arresters etc.

IΔn

In

Characteristic B

[mA] [A] Type 30

10 16 20 25

OLI-10B-1N-030AC-G OLI-16B-1N-030AC-G OLI-20B-1N-030AC-G OLI-25B-1N-030AC-G

Characteristic C Product code 38328 38329 38330 38331

Type OLI-10C-1N-030AC-G OLI-16C-1N-030AC-G OLI-20C-1N-030AC-G OLI-25C-1N-030AC-G

Product code 38333 38334 38335 38336

G

10 000 3

-25

Number of modules

Weight [kg]

Package [pcs]

2 2 2 2

0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25

1 1 1 1

Accessories to OLI Auxiliary switch Interconnecting busbars Terminal extensions

PS-LV-1100-K S2L-... AS-25-S, AS-50-AL01

page C12 page E52 page E57

C7


Minia

OLI

Residual current circuit breakers

RESIDUAL CURRENT CIRCUIT BREAKERS WITH OVERCURRENT PROTECTION OLI (10 kA) Specifications Type

OLI-..AC

OLI-..A

OLI-..AC-G

Standards Approval marks

EN 61009-1

EN 61009-1

EN 61009-1

Number of poles Tripping characteristics Type Rated current In Rated residual current IΔn Rated operating voltage Ue Min. operating voltage 1) Umin Max. operating voltage Umax Rated frequency fn Surge resistance (8/20 μs) Rated short-circuit breaking capacity Icn Rated residual making and breaking capacity IΔm Rated impulse withstand voltage (1.2/50 μs) Uimp Release delay Mechanical endurance Electrical endurance Energy limitation class Degree of protection Mounting on “U” rail according to EN - type Connection Conductor rigid (solid, stranded) Conductor flexible with a sleeve Torque Top or bottom connection Operating conditions Ambient temperature Working position 1) For preserving the function of the test push-button 2) For detailed connection of conductors see the table on page C11

2 B, C AC 6 ÷ 40 A 30, 300 mA 230 V a.c. 100 V a.c. 255 V a.c. 50 ÷ 60 Hz 1 kA 10 kA 10 kA 6 kV 10 000 operating cycles 10 000 operating cycles 3 IP20 TH 35

2 B, C A 6 ÷ 40 A 30, 300 mA 230 V a.c. 100 V a.c. 255 V a.c. 50 ÷ 60 Hz 1 kA 10 kA 10 kA 6 kV 10 000 operating cycles 10 000 operating cycles 3 IP20 TH 35

2 B, C G AC-G 10 ÷ 25 A 30 mA 230 V a.c. 100 V a.c. 255 V a.c. 50 ÷ 60 Hz 3 kA 10 kA 10 kA 6 kV 10 ms 10 000 operating cycles 10 000 operating cycles 3 IP20 TH 35

0.75 ÷ 35 mm2 0.75 ÷ 25 mm2 2.5 ÷ 3 Nm yes

0.75 ÷ 35 mm2 0.75 ÷ 25 mm2 2.5 ÷ 3 Nm yes

0.75 ÷ 35 mm2 0.75 ÷ 25 mm2 2.5 ÷ 3 Nm yes

2) 2)

-5 ÷ 40 °C arbitrary

2) 2)

-25 ÷ 40 °C arbitrary

2) 2)

-25 ÷ 40 °C arbitrary

Internal impedance Z and powers losses P

In [A]

L-Pole Z [mΩ]

Characteristic B N-Pole Z [mΩ]

Power loss Pv [W]

L-Pole Z [mΩ]

Characteristic C N-Pole Z [mΩ]

Power loss Pv [W]

6 10 16 20 25 32 40

72 15.4 9.6 7.1 6.1 4.1 3.4

2.1 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.1 1.5 1.5

2.7 1.8 3 3.7 5.1 5.7 7.8

52 13.4 8.7 6.1 6 4.1 3.4

2.1 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.1 1.5 1.5

1.9 1.6 2.8 3.3 5.1 5.7 7.8

Correction of rated currents

2)

In [A] 6 10 16 20 25 32 40 Reference temperature 30 °C

C8

-25 °C 7.20 12 19.20 24 30 38.40 48

-20 °C 7.08 11.80 18.88 23.60 29.50 37.76 47.20

Correction of rated currents for ambient temperature -25°C up to + 40°C [A] 2) -10 °C 0 °C 10 °C 20 °C 6.8 6.7 6.4 6.2 11.4 11.2 10.7 10.4 18.2 17.9 17.1 16.6 22.8 22.4 21.4 20.8 28.5 28 26.8 26 36.5 35.8 34.2 33.3 45.6 44.8 42.8 41.6

30 °C 6 10 16 20 25 32 40

40 °C 5.7 9.5 15.2 19 23.8 30.4 38


OLI

Residual current circuit breakers

Minia

RESIDUAL CURRENT CIRCUIT BREAKERS WITH OVERCURRENT PROTECTION OLI (10 kA) Dimensions OLI

36

7

90

45

90

73.3

44 64 70

Diagram

OLI 1

N

2

N

C9


Minia

OLI

Residual current circuit breakers

RESIDUAL CURRENT CIRCUIT BREAKERS WITH OVERCURRENT PROTECTION OLI (10 kA) Characteristics 1.13 In 1.45 In

„Characteristic B: for protection of line of electrical circuits with equipment, which does not cause At ambient temperature +30 °C

10 000 120

current surges (lighting and socket circuits etc.). The short-circuit release is set to (3 ÷ 5) In .

5 000 60

„Characteristic C: for protection of line of electrical circuits with equipment, which causes current

min.

30

surges (light bulb groups, motors etc.). The short-circuit release is set to (6 ÷ 9) In .

1 000 10

500

5 2

100

1

50

Tripping characteristics of circuit breakers according to EN 61009-1 Tripping characteristic type B, C Int = 1.13 In It = 1.45 In

Thermal release Conventional non-tripping current Int for t ≥ 1 h Conventional tripping current It for t < 1 h Current I3 for 1 s < t < 60 s and In ≤ 32 A 1 s < t < 120 s and In > 32 A t - break time of the circuit breaker

10 tv [s]

5

1 0.5

B

0.1

C

Tripping characteristic type B C

Electromagnetic release Current I4 for

0.002

0.1 s < t < 45 s 0.1 s < t < 90 s 0.1 s < t < 15 s 0.1 s < t < 30 s Current I5 for t < 0.1 s

0.001

t - break time of the circuit breaker

0.01 0.006

1

2

3

I3 = 2.55 In

4

6 8 10

B

C

20

30 40

(for In ≤ 32 A) (for In > 32 A) (for In ≤ 32 A) (for In > 32 A)

I4 = 3 In I4 = 5 In I5 = 5 In

I5 = 10 In

60 80 x In

Characteristics I2t OLI-..B-..

OLI-..C-..

10 A

50 000 40 000 30 000

6A

20 000 15 000 10 000

7 000

7 000

5 000 4 000 3 000

5 000 4 000 3 000

2 000 1 500

2 000 1 500

700

50 40 30

20

20

20 000

70

50 40 30

4 000

100

70

5 000 6 000 7 000 8 000 9 000 10 000

100

3 000

200 150

2 000

200 150

1 500

500 400 300

800 900 1 000

500 400 300

I p [A]

C10

1 000

I p [A]

20 000

700

6A

4 000

1 000

10 A

5 000 6 000 7 000 8 000 9 000 10 000

I 2t [A2 s]

10 000

16, 20 A

3 000

20 000 15 000

25, 32, 40 A

2 000

16, 20 A

1 500

25, 32, 40 A

50 000 40 000 30 000

I 2t [A2 s]

90 000 70 000

800 900 1 000

90 000 70 000


OLI

Residual current circuit breakers

Minia

RESIDUAL CURRENT CIRCUIT BREAKERS WITH OVERCURRENT PROTECTION OLI (10 kA) Connection of conductors and interconnecting busbars Terminal system Design: two levels of terminals with a fixed barrier between them. Connection: each level enables connection of both the conductor and

interconnecting busbar (interconnecting busbars with pins, type „S“ – see page E52). This is possible from both sides of the device. For connection range see the table below. Safety: the terminals are equipped with sliding plastic caps, which effectively increase protection against dangerous contact with live parts.

Level 1 Barrier Level 2

Advantages Easy connection and check of conductors at simultaneous connection

of interconnecting busbar – the busbar does not cover the conductor connecting place.

Possibility of connection:

- conductors of various cross sections - up to 4 conductors in the terminal - conductor of cross-section up to 35 mm2

Mounting/demounting on/from „DIN“ rails New system of latches enables:

- very quick mounting and demounting by hand, without any tool needed. - withdrawal/replacement of the residual current circuit breaker from a row of devices interconnected by the interconnecting busbar up or down without interruption of adjacent circuit or removal of the busbar.

Connection range

3 conductors

Rigid conductor (solid, stranded) Level 1 Level 2 1x ( ≤ 35 mm2) 1x ( ≤ 25 mm2) 2x ( ≤ 10 mm2) 2x ( ≤ 6 mm2) 2 1x ( ≤ 10 mm2) 1x ( ≤ 35 mm ) 2 1x ( ≤ 16 mm2) 1x ( ≤ 25 mm ) 2 1x ( ≤ 16 mm ) 1x ( ≤ 25 mm2) 1x ( ≤ 35 mm2) 2x ( ≤ 6 mm2)

4 conductors

2x ( ≤ 10 mm2) 2x ( ≤ 10 mm2)

Number of connected conductors 1 conductor 2 conductors

1x ( ≤ 25 mm2) 2x ( ≤ 6 mm2)

Conductor flexible with a sleeve Level 1 Level 2 1x ( ≤ 25 mm2) 1x ( ≤ 16 mm2) 2x ( ≤ 6 mm2) 2x ( ≤ 4 mm2) 2 1x ( ≤ 25 mm ) 1x ( ≤ 6 mm2) 1x ( ≤ 16 mm2) 1x ( ≤ 25 mm2) 1x ( ≤ 16 mm2) 2x ( ≤ 6 mm2) 2x ( ≤ 6 mm2)

1x ( ≤ 16 mm2) 2x ( ≤ 2,5 mm2) 2x ( ≤ 4 mm2) 1x ( ≤ 16 mm2) 2x ( ≤ 4 mm2)

C11


Minia

Residual current circuit breakers

ACCESSORIES FOR OLE, OLI Auxiliary switch „Installation: on the right side of the residual current

circuit breaker with overload protection. „For signalling the position of contacts of residual current

circuit breakers with overload protection.

Auxiliary switch with handle adapter Arrangement Type Product Number of contacts code of modules 111) PS-LV-1100-K 38938 0.5 1) Each digit indicates successively the number of make and break contacts

Weight [kg] 0.05

Specifications Type

PS-LV-..

Standards

EN 60947-5-1, EN 62019

Approval marks Arrangement of contacts 1) Rated operating voltage / current

Ue / Ie

AC-13 AC-14

DC-13

Mechanical endurance Electrical endurance Mounting Degree of protection Connection Conductor rigid (solid, stranded) Conductor flexible Torque Top or bottom connection Operating conditions Ambient temperature Working position 1) Each digit indicates successively the number of make and break contacts

C12

11 400 V a.c. / 2 A 230 V a.c. / 6 A 400 V a.c. / 2 A 230 V a.c. / 6 A 220 V d.c. / 1 A 110 V d.c. / 1 A 60 V d.c. / 3 A 24 V d.c. / 6 A 10 000 operating cycles 10 000 operating cycles on the right side of the device IP20 0.75 ÷ 2.5 mm2 0.75 ÷ 2.5 mm2 0.5 Nm yes -25 ÷ 40 °C arbitrary

Package [pcs] 1


Minia

Residual current circuit breakers

ACCESSORIES FOR OLE, OLI Dimensions

Diagram

PS-LV-1100

PS-LV-1100

9

6

13

21

14

22

90

45

90

73.3

44 64 68.5

Installation of auxiliary switch PS-LV-1100 1. At mounting the levers of auxiliary switch and of the device are in OFF position. 2. Slide the handle adapter on the control lever of the device from the right. 3. Swing away the fastening tapes. 4. Slide the auxiliary switch on the device from the right to interconnect the shaft of the control lever and the switching system. 5. Secure the fastening tapes. 6. Check correct function by switching.

OLI, OLE

PS-LV-1100 OD-OL-NR01

1

3

2 3 4

5 5 5 5

5

OLI, OLE

PS-LV-1100 max. 2x

C13


Minia

OFE

Residual current circuit breakers

RESIDUAL CURRENT CIRCUIT BREAKERS OFE (6 kA) „Surge current resistance up to 1 kA (8/20 μs). „Possibility of interconnection with circuit breakers LPE

„They react to sine-wave residual current (type AC). „For protection:

– against dangerous contact with live parts (IΔn ≤ 30 mA) – against dangerous contact with dead parts – against fire or short-circuit in reduced insulation capacity of electrical equipment (IΔn ≤ 300 mA) „Possibility of additional mounting of auxiliary switches PS-OF-1100 on the right side of the device.

(LPN) by means of interconnecting busbars. „N-pole of residual current circuit breakers in switching

on it closes before and in switching off it opens after the other poles.

6 000

Residual current circuit breakers, 2-pole, type AC „ Standard type for common use in building and housing installations up to 40 A, 230 V a.c. IΔn [mA] 30 30 300 300

In [A] 25 40 25 40

Type

Product code 35299 35301 35300 35302

OFE-25-2-030AC OFE-40-2-030AC OFE-25-2-300AC OFE-40-2-300AC

Number of modules 2 2 2 2

Weight [kg] 0.28 0.28 0.28 0.28

Package [pcs] 1 1 1 1

Weight [kg] 0.52 0.52 0.52 0.52 0.52

Package [pcs] 1 1 1 1 1

Residual current circuit breakers, 4-pole, type AC „ Standard type for common use in building and housing installations up to 63 A, 230/400 V a.c. IΔn [mA] 30 300

In [A] 25 40 63 40 63

Type OFE-25-4-030AC OFE-40-4-030AC OFE-63-4-030AC OFE-40-4-300AC OFE-63-4-300AC

Product code 35303 35305 35307 35306 35308

Number of modules 4 4 4 4 4

Accessories to OFE Auxiliary switch Interconnecting busbars Terminal extensions

C14

PS-OF-1100 G2L-1000-16, G4L-1000-16 AS-25-G, AS-25-S

page C22 page E52 page E57


OFE

Minia

Residual current circuit breakers

RESIDUAL CURRENT CIRCUIT BREAKERS OFE (6 kA) Specifications Type

OFE-..-2-..

OFE-..-4-..

Standards Approval marks

EN 61008, IEC 755

EN 61008, IEC 755

Number of poles Type Rated current Rated residual current Rated operating voltage Min. operating voltage 1) Max. operating voltage Rated frequency Rated conditional short-circuit current: with back-up fuse In ≤ 63 A gG

2 AC 25, 40 A 30, 300 mA 230 V a.c. 100 V a.c. 240 V a.c. 50/60 Hz

4 AC 25, 40, 63 A 30, 300 mA 230/400 V a.c. 100 V a.c. 240/415 V a.c. 50/60 Hz

6 kA

-

In IΔn Ue Umin Umax fn Inc

3)

6 kA with back-up fuse In ≤ 100 A gG 6 kA 6 kA with back-up miniature circuit breaker LPE, LPN, L ST with In max. 1:1 500 A 800 A Rated making and breaking capacity Im Surge resistance (8/20 μs) 1 kA 1 kA Release delay Mechanical endurance >10 000 operating cycles >10 000 operating cycles EElectrical endurance >10 000 operating cycles >10 000 operating cycles Degree of protection IP20 IP20 Connection 1.5 ÷ 25 mm2 Conductor 1 ÷ 16 mm2 Torque 3 Nm 3 Nm Top or bottom connection yes yes Operating conditions Ambient temperature -5 ÷ 45 °C -5 ÷ 45 °C Working position arbitrary arbitrary IEC 980:1993 2) Seismic resistance IEC 980:1993 2) 1) For preserving the function of the test push-button 2) It passed the seismic tests for NPP Dukovany and Temelín 3) Rated conditional short-circuit current relates to short-circuit protection. It is also possible to protect residual current circuit breakers against overload by circuit breaker and fuse-link. In this case In of MCB has to be equal or lower than In of RCCB (In MCB ≤ In RCCB) a In and In of fuse-link has to be by one degree lower than In of RCCB (In of fuse-link by one degree lower ≤ In RCCB)

Powers losses P OFE-...-2-...

OFE-...-4-... In [A] 25 40

1)

IΔn [A]

P 1) [W/pole]

In [A]

IΔn [A]

P 1) [W/pole]

0.03 0.30 0.03 0.30

2 1 4 2.5

25

0.03 0.03 0.30 0.03 0.30

1.2 3.2 1.65 4 3.2

40 63

Mean values 1)

Mean values

Dimensions

36

72

7

90

OFE-..4-..

45

OFE-..-2-..

44 64

C15


Minia

OFE

Residual current circuit breakers

RESIDUAL CURRENT CIRCUIT BREAKERS OFE (6 kA) Diagram OFE-..-2-..

OFE-..-4-..

1

N

1

3

5

N

2

N

2

4

6

N

Connection

C16

residual current circuit breaker 4-pole in 3-phase circuits without N-pole

N

L1

L2

L3

1

3

5

N

2

4

6

N

1

3

5

N

2

4

6

N

OFE-..-4-..

L

OFE-..-4-..

residual current circuit breaker 4-pole in 1-phase circuits with N-pole


OFI

Minia

Residual current circuit breakers

RESIDUAL CURRENT CIRCUIT BREAKERS OFI (10 kA) „For protection:

„Possibility of additional mounting of auxiliary switches

– against dangerous contact with live parts (IΔn ≤ 30 mA) – against dangerous contact with dead parts – against fire or short-circuit in reduced insulation capacity of electrical equipment

PS-OF-1100 or PS-OF125-1100 on the right side of the device. „Possibility of interconnection with circuit breakers LPN (LPE)) by means of interconnecting busbars. „N-pole of residual current circuit breakers in switching on it closes before and in switching off it opens after the other poles.

Residual current circuit breakers, 2-pole, type AC „They react to sine-wave residual current. „Standard type for common use in building and

„Surge current resistance up to 1 kA (8/20 μs).

industrial installations up to 40 A, 230 V a.c. 10 000

IΔn [mA] 30 100 300

In [A] 25 40 25 40 25 40

Type OFI-25-2-030AC OFI-40-2-030AC OFI-25-2-100AC OFI-40-2-100AC OFI-25-2-300AC OFI-40-2-300AC

Product code 36797 36800 36798 36801 36799 36802

Residual current circuit breakers, 4-pole, type AC „They react to sine-wave residual current. „Standard type for common use in building and industrial installations up to 125 A, 230/400 V a.c.

Number of modules 2 2 2 2 2 2

Weight [kg] 0.28 0.28 0.28 0.28 0.28 0.28

Package [pcs] 1 1 1 1 1 1

„Surge current resistance up to 1 kA (8/20 μs).

10 000

IΔn [mA]

30

100

300

500

In [A] 25 40 63 80 100 125 25 40 63 100 125 25 40 63 80 100 125 40 63 100 125

Type OFI-25-4-030AC OFI-40-4-030AC OFI-63-4-030AC OFI-80-4-030AC OFI-100-4-030AC OFI-125-4-030AC OFI-25-4-100AC OFI-40-4-100AC OFI-63-4-100AC OFI-100-4-100AC OFI-125-4-100AC OFI-25-4-300AC OFI-40-4-300AC OFI-63-4-300AC OFI-80-4-300AC OFI-100-4-300AC OFI-125-4-300AC OFI-40-4-500AC OFI-63-4-500AC OFI-100-4-500AC OFI-125-4-500AC

Product code 36806 36809 36813 36817 36819 36823 36807 36810 36814 36820 36824 36808 36811 36815 36818 36821 36825 36812 36816 36822 36826

Number of modules 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

Weight [kg] 0.52 0.52 0.52 0.52 0.52 0.52 0.52 0.52 0.52 0.52 0.52 0.52 0.52 0.52 0.52 0.52 0.52 0.52 0.52 0.52 0.52

Package [pcs] 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

C17


Minia

OFI

Residual current circuit breakers

RESIDUAL CURRENT CIRCUIT BREAKERS OFI (10 kA) Residual current circuit breakers, 2-pole, type A „They react to both sine-wave residual current and pulsating direct residual current (type A). „Standard type for common use in building and industrial installations up to 40 A, 230 V a.c.

„Surge current resistance up to 1 kA (8/20 μs).

10 000

IΔn [mA] 10 30 100 300

In [A] 16 25 40 25 40 25 40

Type OFI-16-2-010A OFI-25-2-030A OFI-40-2-030A OFI-25-2-100A OFI-40-2-100A OFI-25-2-300A OFI-40-2-300A

Product code 35273 35274 35277 35275 35278 35276 35279

Residual current circuit breakers, 4-pole, type A „They react to both sine-wave residual current and pulsating direct residual current (type A). „Standard type for common use in building and industrial installations up to 125 A, 230/400 V a.c.

Number of modules 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Weight [kg] 0.28 0.28 0.28 0.28 0.28 0.28 0.28

Package [pcs] 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

„Surge current resistance up to 1 kA (8/20 μs).

10 000

IΔn [mA]

30

100

300

500

C18

In [A] 25 40 63 80 100 125 25 40 63 100 125 25 40 63 80 100 125 40 63 100 125

Type OFI-25-4-030A OFI-40-4-030A OFI-63-4-030A OFI-80-4-030A OFI-100-4-030A OFI-125-4-030A OFI-25-4-100A OFI-40-4-100A OFI-63-4-100A OFI-100-4-100A OFI-125-4-100A OFI-25-4-300A OFI-40-4-300A OFI-63-4-300A OFI-80-4-300A OFI-100-4-300A OFI-125-4-300A OFI-40-4-500A OFI-63-4-500A OFI-100-4-500A OFI-125-4-500A

Product code 35280 35283 35287 36830 36831 36835 35281 35284 35288 36832 36836 35282 35285 35289 35291 36833 36837 35286 35290 36834 36838

-25

Number of modules 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

Weight [kg] 0.52 0.52 0.52 0.52 0.52 0.52 0.52 0.52 0.52 0.52 0.52 0.52 0.52 0.52 0.52 0.52 0.52 0.52 0.52 0.52 0.52

Package [pcs] 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

-25


OFI

Minia

Residual current circuit breakers

RESIDUAL CURRENT CIRCUIT BREAKERS OFI (10 kA) Residual current circuit breakers, type AC-G, A-G „Special residual current circuit breakers which reduce the number of undesirable releases. „Release delay: 10 ms. „Surge current resistance up to 3 kA (8/20 μs ). „It is recommended to install them before the equipment causing short-time (up to 10 ms) stray currents – heavy induction motors, large heating bodies, interference suppressors, surge voltage arresters etc.

„For protection:

– against dangerous contact with live parts (IΔn ≤ 30 mA) – against dangerous contact with dead parts – against fire or short-circuit in reduced insulation capacity of electrical equipment. „Possibility of additional mounting of auxiliary switches PS-OF-1100 on the right side of the device. „Possibility of interconnection with circuit breakers LPN (LPE)) by means of interconnecting busbars.

Residual current circuit breakers, 2-pole, type AC-G „They react to sine-wave residual current (type AC). 10 000

IΔn [mA] 30

In [A] 25 40

Type OFI-25-2-030AC-G OFI-40-2-030AC-G

Product code 38437 38438

Number of modules 2 2

Weight [kg] 0.28 0.28

-25

G

Package [pcs] 1 1

Residual current circuit breakers, 4-pole, type AC-G „They react to sine-wave residual current (type AC). 10 000

IΔn [mA] 30 100

In [A] 25 40 63 25 40 63

Type OFI-25-4-030AC-G OFI-40-4-030AC-G OFI-63-4-030AC-G OFI-25-4-100AC-G OFI-40-4-100AC-G OFI-63-4-100AC-G

Product code 38439 38440 38441 38443 38444 38445

Number of modules 4 4 4 4 4 4

Weight [kg] 0.52 0.52 0.52 0.52 0.52 0.52

-25

G

Package [pcs] 1 1 1 1 1 1

Residual current circuit breakers, 2-pole, type A-G „They react to both sine-wave residual current and pulsating direct residual current (type A). 10 000

IΔn [mA] 30

In [A] 25 40

Type OFI-25-2-030A-G OFI-40-2-030A-G

Product code 38447 38448

Number of modules 2 2

Weight [kg] 0.28 0.28

-25

G

Package [pcs] 1 1

Residual current circuit breakers, 4-pole, type A-G „They react to both sine-wave residual current and pulsating direct residual current (type A). 10 000

IΔn [mA] 30 100

In [A] 25 40 63 25 40 63

Type OFI-25-4-030A-G OFI-40-4-030A-G OFI-63-4-030A-G OFI-25-4-100A-G OFI-40-4-100A-G OFI-63-4-100A-G

Product code 35292 35294 36839 35293 35295 35296

Number of modules 4 4 4 4 4 4

Weight [kg] 0.52 0.52 0.52 0.52 0.52 0.52

-25

G

Package [pcs] 1 1 1 1 1 1

C19


Minia

OFI

Residual current circuit breakers

RESIDUAL CURRENT CIRCUIT BREAKERS OFI (10 kA) Residual current circuit breakers, 4-pole, selective, type A-S „They react to both sine-wave residual current and

„It is recommended to install them before the equipment

pulsating direct residual current (type A). „Special residual current circuit breakers which reduce the number of undesirable releases and enable selective switching of residual current circuit breakers.

causing short-time (up to 40 ms) stray currents – heavy induction motors, large heating bodies, interference suppressors, surge voltage arresters etc. „Surge resistance: 5 kA (8/20 μs). „Release delay: 40 ms. 10 000

IΔn [mA]

In [A] 40 63

300

Type

Product code 35297 35298

OFI-40-4-300A-S OFI-63-4-300A-S

Number of modules 4 4

Weight [kg] 0.52 0.52

-25

S

Package [pcs] 1 1

Accessories to OFI Auxiliary switches Interconnecting busbars Terminal extensions

PS-OF-1100, PS-OF125-1100 G2L-1000-16, G4L-1000-16, S4L-1000-16 AS-25-G, AS-25-S

Powers losses P OFI-...-2-... In [A] 16 25 40 1)

IΔn [A] 0.01 0.03; 0.1 0.30 0.03; 0.1 0.30

P 1) [W/pole] 2.5 2 1 4 2.5

Mean values

page C22 page E52 page E57

OFI-...-4-... In [A] 25 40 63 80 1) Mean values

IΔn [A] 0.03; 0.1 0.3 0.03; 0.1 0.3; 0.5 0.03; 0.1 0.3; 0.5 0.3

P 1) [W/pole] 1.2 0.65 3.2 1.65 4 3.2 4.8

Specifications Type

OFI-..-2-..

OFI-..-4-..

OFI-100-4-.. OFI-125-4-..

OFI-..-2-..-G

OFI-..-4-..-G

OFI-..-4-..-S

Standards Approval marks

EN 61008, IEC 755

EN 61008, IEC 755

EN 61008, IEC 755

EN 61008, IEC 755

EN 61008, IEC 755

EN 61008, IEC 755

Number of poles 2 4 4 2 4 4 G AC- G, A-G G A- S S Type AC, A AC, A AC, A AC-G, A-G 16, 25, 40 A 25, 40, 63, 80 A 100, 125 A 25, 40 A 25, 40, 63 A 40, 63 A Rated curren In 10, 30, 100, 300 mA 10, 30, 100, 300, 500 mA 30, 100, 300, 500 mA 30 mA 30, 100 mA 300 mA Rated residual current IΔn Rated operating voltage Ue 230 V a.c. 230/400 V a.c. 230/400 V a.c. 230 V a.c. 230/400 V a.c. 230/400 V a.c. Min. operating voltage 1) Umin 100 V a.c. 100 V a.c. 100 V a.c. 100 V a.c. 100 V a.c. 100 V a.c. 240/415 V a.c. 240/415 V a.c. 240 V a.c. 240/415 V a.c. 240/415 V a.c. Max. operating voltage Umax 240 V a.c. 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz Rated frequency fn Rated conditional short-circuit current: Inc with back-up fuse In ≤ 63 A gG 10 kA 10 kA with back-up fuse In ≤ 100 A gG 10 kA 10 kA 10 kA 10 kA with back-up MCB LPN, LST with In max. 1:1 10 kA 10 kA 10 kA 10 kA 10 kA 10 kA 6 kA 6 kA 6 kA 6 kA 6 kA 6 kA with back-up MCB LPE with In max. 1:1 Rated making and breaking capacity Im 500 A 800 A 1 250 A 500 A 800 A 800 A Surge resistance (8/20 μs) 1 kA 1 kA 1 kA 3 kA 3 kA 5 kA Release delay 10 ms 10 ms 40 ms Mechanical endurance >10 000 operating cycles >10 000 operating cycles >10 000 operating cycles >10 000 operating cycles >10 000 operating cycles >10 000 operating cycles Electrical endurance >10 000 operating cycles >10 000 operating cycles >10 000 operating cycles >10 000 operating cycles >10 000operating cycles >10 000 operating cycles Degree of protection IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20 Connection 1.5 ÷ 25 mm2 2.5 ÷ 50 mm2 1 ÷ 16 mm2 1.5 ÷ 25 mm2 1.5 ÷ 25 mm2 Conductor 1 ÷ 16 mm2 Torque 2.5 Nm 3 Nm 3.5 Nm 3 Nm 3 Nm 3 Nm Top or bottom connection yes yes yes yes yes yes Operating conditions Ambient temperature type AC -5 ÷ 45 °C -5 ÷ 45 °C -5 ÷ 45 °C -25 ÷ 45 °C -25 ÷ 45 °C -25 ÷ 45 °C type A -25 ÷ 45 °C -25 ÷ 45 °C -25 ÷ 45 °C -25 ÷ 45 °C -25 ÷ 45 °C -25 ÷ 45 °C Working position arbitrary arbitrary arbitrary arbitrary arbitrary arbitrary IEC 980:1993 2) IEC 980:1993 2) IEC 980:1993 2) IEC 980:1993 2) Seismic resistance IEC 980:1993 2) 1) For preserving the function of the test push-button 2) It passed the seismic tests for NPP Dukovany and Temelín 3) Rated conditional short-circuit current is related to short-circuit protection. It is also possible to protect residual current circuit breakers against overload by circuit breaker and fuse-link. In this case In of MCB has to be equal or lower than In of RCCB (In MCB ≤ In RCCB) and In of fuse-link has to be by one degree lower than In of RCCB (In of fuse-link by one degree lower ≤ In RCCB)

C20


OFI

Minia

Residual current circuit breakers

RESIDUAL CURRENT CIRCUIT BREAKERS OFI (10 kA) Dimensions OFI-..-4-..

36

72

7

90

45

OFI-..-2-..

44 64

OFI-125-4-..

45

6

72

87

71

44 64

Diagram OFI-..-2-..

OFI-100-4-.. , OFI-125-4-..

OFI-..-4-.. 1

N

1

3

5

N

1

3

5

N

2

N

2

4

6

N

2

4

6

N

Connection residual current circuit breaker 4-pole 100 and 125 A in 1-phase circuits with N-pole L

1

3

2

4

1

3

5

N

2

4

6

N

N

L1

L2

L3

5

N

1

3

5

N

6

N

2

4

6

N

OFI-..-4-..

N

OFI-..-4-..

L

residual current circuit breaker 4-pole in 3-phase circuits without N-pole

OFI-..-4-..

residual current circuit breaker 4-pole 25 รท 80 A in 1-phase circuits with N-pole

C21


Minia

Residual current circuit breakers

ACCESSORIES FOR OFE, OFI Auxiliary switches for residual current circuit breakers „Accessories to: OFI and OFE. „Installation: on the right side of the residual current circuit breaker. Accessories to

„For signalling the position of contacts of residual

current circuit breakers.

Type

Product Arrangement code of contacts 1) OFI, OFE do 80 A PS-OF-1100 35309 11 OFI 100, 125 A PS-OF125-1100 36840 11 1) Each digit indicates successively the number of make and break contacts

Number of modules 0.5 0.5

Weight [kg] 0.07 0.07

Package [pcs] 1 1

Specifications Type Standards

PS-OF-1100

PS-OF125-1100

EN 62019

EN 62019 EN 60947-5-1

11 230 V a.c. / 6 A 230 V a.c. / 3.6 A 220 V d.c. / 1 A 24 V a.c. / 50 mA MCB 6 A, characteristic B or C fuse 6 A gG 10 000 operating cycles IP20 on the right side of the device

11 230 V a.c. / 5 A 220 V d.c. / 0.5 A 24 V a.c. / 50 mA MCB 6 A, characteristic B or C fuse 6 A gG 10 000 operating cycles IP20 on the right side of the device

Approval marks

Arrangement of contacts 1) Rated operating voltage / current Ue/Ie

Min. voltage / current Short-circuit protection

AC-12 AC-14 DC-12

Electrical endurance Degree of protection Mounting Connection Conductor rigid (solid, stranded) 0.75 ÷ 2.5 mm2 Conductor flexible 0.75 ÷ 2.5 mm2 Torque 0.8 Nm Top or bottom connection yes Operating conditions Ambient temperature -25 ÷ 45 °C Working position arbitrary 1) Each digit indicates successively the number of make and break contacts

C22

0.75 ÷ 2.5 mm2 0.75 ÷ 2.5 mm2 0.8 Nm yes -25 ÷ 45 °C arbitrary


Minia

Residual current circuit breakers

ACCESSORIES FOR OFE, OFI Dimensions PS-OF125-1100

21

45

87

13

45

11 23

24

22

12 9

90

PS-OF-1100

14 6

43

9 60

7

44 64

Diagram PS-OF-1100

PS-OF125-1100

13 21

11 23

22

24 14

12

C23


Minia

Residual current circuit breakers

BASIC TERMS, SYMBOLS AND BREAK TIMES „Rated residual operating current IΔn is the value of

„Ambient temperature T for the residual current circuit

residual current IΔn specified by the manufacturer, at which the residual current circuit breaker must switch out under specified conditions. Alternating residual current must by cut off by the residual current circuit breaker within (0.5 ÷ 1) IΔn

breakers is (-5 ÷ +40) °C according to almost all international standards. Some residual current circuit breakers work in an extended range (-25 ÷ +40) °C. This possibility is identified by the following symbol on the rating plate:

Such function of the protected circuit is achieved by connection of the selective residual current circuit breaker (see Fig. 1) before the standard or G type residual current circuit breaker, with the following ratio of rated residual currents:

-25

„Rated current In is the value of current specified by the

manufacturer, which can be transferred by the residual current circuit breaker continuously. So the current In can pass through the contacts for an unlimited time. Therefore it is, for instance, possible to use a residual current circuit breaker with In = 25 A in the circuit with max. current up to 25 A. For protection against overload of the residual current circuit breakers OFI, OFE it is recommended to use the circuit breakers LPE, LPN, LST with rated current Incircuit breaker ≤ In RCCB „Rated operating voltage Ue is the voltage the residual

current circuit breaker is to be connected to and which properties are related to. The connected voltage has no effect on the device function but on the function of the test circuit and isolation properties. „Rated frequency fn is the frequency the residual current

circuit breaker is designed for and at which it works correctly under stated conditions. Majority of residual current circuit breakers are designed for fn = 50 to 60 Hz. As the residual current circuit breaker function is based on the induction principle, the residual current behaviour and frequency show an effect upon tripping. When using a device designed for 50/60 Hz in a network with a different frequency, the user must count on a change of the tripping threshold i.e. a change of IΔn „Rated conditional short-circuit current Inc – short-

circuit strength. The function and design principle does not allow to use the residual current circuit breaker for protection against short-circuit. For circuit protection it is necessary to use a circuit breaker or a fuse. These elements cut the short-circuited circuit safely off. The residual current circuit breaker must only withstand the through-going short-circuit current. The amplitude of the maximum through current is defined as rated conditional short-circuit current Inc. The shortcircuit strength is then expressed by the current Inc. For example, on the rating plate, Inc = 10 kA is expressed by the following symbol:

IΔnS = 0.3 A

„Residual current circuit breaker – type AC – reacts to

sine-wave residual current – it is used in conventional AC networks

„Residual current circuit breaker – type A – reacts

IΔn- = 0.1A

IΔnG = 0.03 A

to sine-wave alternating and pulsating direct residual currents – it is used in conventional AC networks and the networks with phase power regulation etc. load

„Residual current circuit breaker – type G – special

residual current circuit breaker reducing the number of undesirable cut-offs. It is mainly installed before the devices causing short-time (up to 10 ms) stray currents. Identification: G Surge resistance: 3 kA (8/20 μs) Release delay: 10 ms

G „Residual current circuit breaker – type S – special

residual current circuit breaker, which is mainly intended for selective switching of residual current circuit breakers and reduction of undesirable cut-offs. It is installed before the devices causing short-time (up to 40 ms) stray currents. Identification: S Surge resistance: 5 kA (8/20 μs) Release delay: 40 ms

S Selective (discriminating) switching means that if the residual current circuit breakers are connected in series, only the device in which circuit a failure occurs will cut off the current. More specifically, only the device in which the tripping residual current appears due to a failure in the protected circuit will turn off the current. The advantage consists in maintaining the power supply in the other circuits not affected by the failure.

load

Fig. 1. Simplified example of selective connection of residual current circuit breakers

IΔn S ≥ 3 x IΔn -,G IΔnS rated residual operating current of the selective residual current circuit breaker IΔn -,G rated residual operating current of standard or G type residual current circuit breaker The main reason of selective disconnecting of circuits is higher time delay of the selective residual current circuit breakers in tripping (compared to standard or G type ones).

„Residual current circuit breaker with overcurrent

protection – this device is a combination of residual current circuit breaker and circuit breaker with 2-module width – it saves the space in the switchboard compared to conventional connection of two separate devices (3 modules). This eliminates the problem of back-up protection and interconnection. The disadvantage of such a design compared to conventional one is that it is not possible to identify whether the tripping was actuated by the residual current circuit breaker or by the circuit breaker.

10 000

Min. time delay and break times of the residual current circuit breakers Min. time delay Tv Break times t (according to EN 61008-1)

C24

at IΔn at 2IΔn at 5IΔn at 500 A note

s s s s s

standard t ≤ 0.3 t ≤ 0.15 t ≤ 0.04 t ≤ 0.04 no bottom limits of the break time

Type of residual current circuit breakers G 0.01 0.01 ≤ t ≤ 0.3 0.01 ≤ t ≤ 0.15 0.01 ≤ t ≤ 0.04 0.01 ≤ t ≤ 0.04 value 0.01 s is not given by standard

S 0.04 0.13 ≤ t ≤ 0.5 0.06 ≤ t ≤ 0.2 0.05 ≤ t ≤ 0.15 0.04 ≤ t ≤ 0.15 break times are valid for the residual current circuit breaker with In ≥ 25 A and IΔn > 0.03 A


Minia

‰Overview of overvoltage protections...............................................................................D2 ‰Lightning current arresters - type 1.................................................................................. D3 ‰Combined lightning current and surge voltage

arresters - type 1 + type 2...................................................................................................... D8 ‰Surge voltage arresters - type 2.........................................................................................D12 ‰Surge voltage arresters - type 3.........................................................................................D16 ‰Surge voltage arresters for photovoltaic systems...................................................D19 ‰Replaceable modules..............................................................................................................D21 ‰Recommendations for design, installation and measurement

of overvoltage protections.....................................................................................................D22

OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTIONS

D


Minia

Overvoltage protections

OVERVIEW OF OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTIONS T1

Design

T1 + T2

Preview

Type

SJB

SJBplus

SJBC

SVBC

Arrester classification according to EN 61643-11

type 1

type 1

type 1 + type 2

type 1 + type 2

Maximum constant operating voltage

Uc

350 V a.c.

440 V a.c.

350 V a.c.

275 V a.c.

Lightning current (10/350 μs) / pole

Iimp

25 kA

50 kA

25 kA

12,5 kA

Rated discharge current (8/20 μs) / pole

In

25 kA

50 kA

25 kA

20 kA

-

-

40 kA

50 kA

≤ 1.5 kV

≤ 2.5 kV

≤ 1.5 kV

≤ 1.5 kV

Replaceable module

9

-

9

-

Optical signalling

9

-

9

9

Remote signalling

9

-

9

9

Maximum discharge current (8/20 μs) / pole Imax Voltage protection level

Up

9 available, - unavailable

T2

Design

T3

T2 FV

Preview

Type Arrester classification according to EN 61643-11

SVC-275

SVC-350

SVM-440

SVD-253

SVD-335

SVF

type 2

type 2

type 2

type 3

type 3

type 2

Maximum constant operating voltage

Uc

275 V a.c.

350 V a.c.

440 V a.c.

253 V a.c

335 V a.c.

1000 V / 600 V d.c.

Rated discharge current (8/20 μs) / pole

In

20 kA

20 kA

20 kA

3 kA

1,5 kA

15 kA

40 kA

40 kA

40 kA

10 kA

4,5 kA

30 kA / 40 kA

Maximum discharge current (8/20 μs) / pole Imax Off -load voltage

Uoc

-

-

-

6 kV

4 kV

-

Voltage protection level

Up

≤ 1.35 kV

≤ 1.4 kV

≤ 2.2 kV

≤ 1.1 kV

≤ 1.2 kV

≤ 5 kV / 3 kV

Replaceable module

-

9

9

9

9

9

Optical signalling

9

9

9

9

9

9

Remote signalling

9

9

9

9

9

9

9 available, - unavailable FV - intended mainly for photovoltaic sources

D2


Minia

Overvoltage protections

LIGHTNING CURRENT ARRESTERS - TYPE 1 „For protection of electric networks and equipment against

„Use: as the first stage (coarse protection) in three degree

overvoltage from direct or indirect lightning strokes in the arresting equipment of buildings, LV lines etc. „For protection of electric networks and equipment in residential, commercial and industrial buildings etc. „It reduces voltage and „cut up“ the overvoltage wave power caused by direct or indirect lightning stroke.

scale of protection against overvoltage – type 1 according to EN 61643-11. „For further information on OEZ offer of overvoltage protection see „Overvoltage protections – Application manual”.

Lightning current arresters SJB-25E-... „Lightning current arresters designed for building, residential, commercial and other similar installations classed in group „big installation threat“. „For four-wire TN-C network, use SJB-25E-3-MZS , and for five-wire TN-S, TT network use SJB-25E-3N-MZS. „The main element is an enclosed spark gap with electronic ignition release able to arrest lightning current up to 25 kA (10/350μs). „Ability of quenching of follow current up to 50 kA. „Possibility of mounting in casual distribution boards and switchboard cabinets Distri. „Design: multipart, consisting of a base and replaceable modules. The modules can be removed in case of measurement or failure without necessity of device disconnection.

Network

Type

TN-C (3L + PEN) TN-S (3L + N + PE )

SJB-25E-3-MZS SJB-25E-3N-MZS

„Remote and visual signalling of the shut-down device

state (after disconnection the lightning current arrester is non-functional and the replaceable module must be replaced). „The modules can be turned in their base by 180°, so that it is also possible to turn the whole device while keeping legibility of description (e.g. at connection from the top). „Lightning current arresters SJB-25E-... partly replace the type 1, which are shown in the cataloguey Minia (N1-2008-C ). The replacements are shown in details in the conversion table at the end of the chapter.

Product code 38357 38358

Number of modules 6 8

Weight [kg] 0.91 1.31

Package [pcs] 1 1

Accessories Terminal extensions

AS-.., CS-FH000.., N3x10-FH000

page E57

D3


Minia

Overvoltage protections

LIGHTNING CURRENT ARRESTERS - TYPE 1 Lightning current arresters SJBplus-50-2,5 „Lightning current arrester for demanding applications, industry, power engineering etc. „For four-wire TN-C network, use 3 pcs SJBplus-50-2.5, and for five-wire TN-S, TT network use the combination 3 pcs SJBplus-50-2.5 + 1 pc SJB-NPE-1,5. „Main component is a powerful arrester gap with electronic ignition release able to arrest lightning current up to 50 kA (10/350 μs).

Connection between L-PEN, L-PE, L-N

Type SJBplus-50-2,5

Product code 39227

Summing spark gap SJB-NPE-1,5 „Lightning current arrester intended especially for connection 3+1 or 1+1. „Use as a summary spark gap between N and PE in TN-S or TT network (connection „3+1“ or „1+1“). „Main component is a powerful arrester gap with electronic ignition release able to arrest lightning current up to 100 kA (10/350 μs).

Connection between N-PE

Type SJB-NPE-1,5

Product code 34716

„Ability of quenching of follow current up to 50 kA. „It is necessary to consider deionization space shown

on page D7.

Number of modules 2

Weight [kg] 0.567

Package [pcs] 1

„Ability of quenching of follow short-circuit current

up to 100 A without the ionized gas. „Possibility of mounting in casual distribution boards

and switchboard cabinets Distri.

Number of modules 2

Weight [kg] 0.32

Package [pcs] 1

Accessories Interconnecting busbars Terminal extensions

D4

G1L-1000-16-L AS-.., CS-FH000.., N3x10-FH000

page E52 page E57


Minia

Overvoltage protections

LIGHTNING CURRENT ARRESTERS - TYPE 1 Specifications Type

SJB-25E-3-MZS

SJB-25E-3N-MZS

SJBplus-50-2.5

SJB-NPE-1.5

Standards

EN 61643-11 IEC 61643-1 VDE 0675-6

EN 61643-11 IEC 61643-1 VDE 0675-6

EN 61643-11 IEC 61643-1 VDE 0675-6

EN 61643-11 IEC 61643-1 VDE 0675-6

230 V/400 V a.c. 350 V a.c. 75 kA (25 kA / pole) 37.5 As 1.4 MJ/Ω 25 kA 50/60 Hz ≤ 1.5 kV type 1 class I class B ≤ 100 ns 50 kA / 264 V a.c. 315 A IP20 TH 35

230 V/400 V a.c. 350 V a.c. 100 kA (25 kA / pole) 50 As 2.5 MJ/Ω 25 kA 100 kA 50/60 Hz ≤ 1.5 kV ≤ 1.5 kV type 1 class I class B ≤ 100 ns ≤ 100 ns 50 kA / 264 V a.c. 0.1 kA 315 A IP20 TH 35

400 V a.c. 440 V a.c. 50 kA 25 As 0.625 MJ/Ω 50 kA 50 kA 50/60 Hz ≤ 2.5 kV ≤ 2.5 kV type 1 class I class B ≤ 100 ns ≤ 100 ns 50 kA / 400 V a.c. 50 kA / 400 V a.c. 500 A IP20 TH 35

230 V a.c. 260 V a.c. 100 kA 50 As 2.5 MJ/Ω 100 kA 50/60 Hz ≤ 1.5 kV type 1 class I class B ≤ 100 ns 0.1 kA IP20 TH 35

2.5 ÷ 35 mm2 2.5 ÷ 25 mm2 4.5 Nm yes

2.5 ÷ 35 mm2 2.5 ÷ 25 mm2 4.5 Nm yes

10 ÷ 50 mm2 16 ÷ 35 mm2 8 Nm yes

10 ÷ 50 mm2 16 ÷ 35 mm2 8 Nm yes

green colour red colour

green colour red colour

-

-

001 250 V a.c. / 1 A 125 V d.c. / 0.2 A 0.14 ÷ 1.5 mm2 0.25 Nm

001 250 V a.c. / 1 A 125 V d.c. / 0.2 A 0.14 ÷ 1.5 mm2 0.25 Nm

-

-

-40 ÷ 80 °C arbitrary

-40 ÷ 85 °C arbitrary

-40 ÷ 85 °C arbitrary

Approval marks Rated voltage Maximum constant operating voltage Lightning current (10/350 μs)

UN UC Iimp

Rated discharge current (8/20 μs)

In

Rated frequency Voltage protection level

fn Up

Arrester classification

Response time

Quenching follow-current

Ifi

Max. backup fuse gG / gL Degree of protection Mounting on “U” rail according to EN – type Connection Conductor rigid (solid, stranded) Conductor flexible Torque Top or bottom connection Optical signalling Functional state Non-functional state Remote signalling Arrangement of contacts 1) Max. voltage / current Umax / Imax

peak value Ipeakl charge Q specific energy W/R L-N N-PE L-PEN L-N N-PE L-PEN according to EN 61643-11 according to IEC 61643-1 according to VDE 0675-6 L-N N-PE L-PEN L-N N-PE L-PEN

Connection – conductor (rigid, flexible) Torque Operating conditions Ambient temperature -40 ÷ 80 °C Working position arbitrary 1) Each digit indicates successively the number of make, break and break-make contacts

D5


Minia

Overvoltage protections

LIGHTNING CURRENT ARRESTERS - TYPE 1 Dimensions ~8

SJB-25E-3N-MZS

45

12 11 14

107.1

142.8

5.5

43.5 64

45 35

5.5

151

SJBplus-50-2.5

43.5 72.5

35

5.5

43.5 58

D6

90

45

SJB-NPE-1.5

90

12 11 14

~7

SJB-25E-3-MZS


Minia

Overvoltage protections

LIGHTNING CURRENT ARRESTERS - TYPE 1 Deionization spaces SJBplus-50-2,5 1)

2) 7.5 mm

55 mm

55 mm

55 mm

120

55 mm

55 mm

55 mm

100 mm

By the action of arrester there happens to the ionized gas from the back side of the arrester. Deionization space is defined in fig. 1). In the deionization space there must not be any highly and medium combustible material (fire reaction class C, D, E or F according to EN 13501-1 +A1) or live bare conductive parts. Minimum distance from materials combustible with difficulty or non-combustible materials (fire reaction class A1, A2, B) is shown in fig. 2).

Diagram SJB-25E-3-MZS

SJB-25E-3N-MZS 12 11 14

12 11 14 N

L1

L2

L3

SJBplus-50-2,5

SJB-NPE-1,5

L/N ( )

N( )

(L/N)

(N)

L1

L2

L3

D7


Minia

Overvoltage protections

+

COMBINED LIGHTNING CURRENT AND SURGE VOLTAGE ARRESTERS - TYPE 1 + TYPE 2 „For protection of electric networks and equipment against

„Use: as the first stage (coarse protection) and the second

overvoltage from direct or indirect lightning strokes in the arresting equipment of buildings, LV lines etc. „For protection against overvoltage caused by atmospheric disturbances and from switching processes in networks. „For protection of common wiring in apartments, houses, commercial buildings etc. „It reduces voltage and „cut up“ the overvoltage wave power caused by direct or indirect lightning stroke and or switching processes in the networks.

stage (medium protection) in three degree scale of protection against overvoltage – type 1 and type 2 according to EN 61643-11. „For further information on OEZ offer of overvoltage protection see „Overvoltage protections – Application manual”.

Lightning current and surge voltage arresters SJBC-25E-... „Lightning current and surge voltage arresters designed „Remote and visual signalling of the shut-down device for building, residential, commercial and other similar state (after disconnection the lightning current arrester installations classed in group „big installation threat“. is non-functional and the replaceable module must be „For four-wire TN-C network, use SJBC-25E-3-MZS, and for replaced). five-wire TN-S, TT network use SJBC-25E-3N-MZS. „The modules can be turned in their base by 180°, so „Main components are an enclosed spark gap with that it is also possible to turn the whole device while electronic ignition release (T1) able to arrest lightning keeping legibility of description (e.g. at connection current up to 25 kA (10/350 μs) and a parallel varistor from the top). (T2) with quicker reaction time (25 ns). „Lightning current and surge voltage arresters SJBC-25E-... „Ability of quenching of follow short-circuit current replace the connection of overvoltage protections up to 25 kA without the ionized gas. of the 1st and 2nd type installed in series next to each „Possibility of mounting in casual distribution boards other, shown in the catalogue Modular devices Minia and switchboard cabinets Distri. (N1-2008-A). The replacements are shown in details „Design: multipart, consisting of a base and replaceable in the conversion table at the end of the chapter. modules. The modules can be removed in case of measurement or failure without necessity of device disconnection.

Network

Type

TN-C (3L + PEN) TN-S (3L + N + PE)

SJBC-25E-3-MZS SJBC-25E-3N-MZS

Product code 38361 38362

Number of modules 6 8

Weight [kg] 1.04 1.43

Package [pcs] 1 1

Accessories Terminal extensions

D8

AS-.., CS-FH000.., N3x10-FH000

page E57


Minia

Overvoltage protections

+

COMBINED LIGHTNING CURRENT AND SURGE VOLTAGE ARRESTERS - TYPE 1 + TYPE 2

Lightning current and surge voltage arresters SVBC-12,5... „Lightning current arresters designed for building, „Remote signalling of state is provided in type ...-S. residential, commercial and other similar installations „Lightning current and surge voltage arresters SVBC-... classed in group „medium installation threat“. can be used instead of connection of overvoltage „For four-wire TN-C network, use 3 pcs SVBC-12.5-1(-S), and protections of the 1st and 2nd type installed in series for five-wire TN-S, TT network use 3 pcs SVBC-12.5-1(-S) next to each other, shown in the catalogue Modular + 1 pc SVBC-50-N. devices Minia (N1-2008-A). The replacements are shown in details in the conversion table at the end „Main component is varistor, able to arrest lightning of the chapter. current up to 12,5 kA (10/350 μs). „Possibility of mounting in casual distribution board and „Possibility of easy interconnection with circuit breakers switchboard cabinets Distri. LPE, LPN by means of interconnecting busbar. „Remote and visual signalling of the shut-down device state (after disconnection the lightning current arrester is non-functional and it must be replaced).

Connection between L-PEN, L-PE, L-N L-PEN, L-PE, L-N

Design

Type

without remote signalling with remote signalling

SVBC-12,5-1 SVBC-12,5-1-S

Product code 39027 38945

Number of modules 1 1

Weight [kg] 0.15 0.16

Package [pcs] 1 1

Summing spark gap SVBC-50-N „Lightning current and surge voltage arrester designed

„Main component is an enclosed spark gap able to arrest

especially for connection 3+1 or 1+1. „Use as a summary spark gap between N and PE in TN-S or TT network (connection „3+1“ or „1+1”).

„Possibility of mounting in casual distribution board and

Connection between N-PE

Design

Type

without remote signalling

SVBC-50-N

lightning current up to 50 kA (10/350 μs). switchboard cabinets Distri.

Product code 39004

Number of modules 1

Weight [kg] 0.11

Package [pcs] 1

Accessories Interconnecting busbars Terminal extensions

G1L-50-16-L, G1L-65-16-L, G1L-1000-16-L, S1L-.., S2L-.., S3L-.., S4L-.. AS-.., CS-FH000.., N3x10-FH000

page E52 page E57

D9


Minia

Overvoltage protections

+

COMBINED LIGHTNING CURRENT AND SURGE VOLTAGE ARRESTERS - TYPE 1 + TYPE 2 Specifications Type

SJBC-25E-3-MZS

SJBC-25E-3N-MZS

SVBC-12,5-1 SVBC-12,5-1-S

SVBC-50-N

Standards

EN 61643-11 IEC 61643-1 VDE 0675-6

EN 61643-11 IEC 61643-1 VDE 0675-6

EN 61643-11 IEC 61643-1 VDE 0675-6

EN 61643-11 IEC 61643-1 VDE 0675-6

230 V/400 V a.c. 350 V a.c. 75 kA (25 kA / pole) 37.5 As 1.4 MJ/Ω 25 kA 40 kA 50/60 Hz ≤ 1.5 kV type 1 and type 2 class I and class II class B and class C ≤ 25 ns 25 kA / 264 V a.c. 315 A IP20 TH 35

230 V/400 V a.c. 350 V a.c. 100 kA (25 kA / pole) 50 As 2.5 MJ/Ω 25 kA 100 kA 40 kA 50/60 Hz ≤ 1.5 kV ≤ 1.5 kV type 1 and type 2 class I and class II class B and class C ≤ 25 ns ≤ 100 ns 25 kA / 264 V a.c. 0.1 kA 315 A IP20 TH 35

230 V a.c. 275 V a.c. 12.5 kA 6.25 As 39 kJ/Ω 20 kA 20 kA 50 kA 50 kA 50/60 Hz ≤ 1.5 kV ≤ 1.5 kV type 1 and type 2 class I and class II class B and class C ≤ 25 ns ≤ 25 ns 160 A gL IP20 TH 35

230 V a.c. 255 V a.c. 50 kA 25 As 625 kJ/Ω 50 kA 100 kA 50/60 Hz ≤ 1.5 kV type 1 and type 2 class I and class II class B and class C ≤ 100 ns 0.1 kA IP20 TH 35

Approval marks Rated voltage Maximum constant operating voltage Lightning current (10/350 μs)

UN UC Iimp

Rated discharge current (8/20 μs)

In

Maximum discharge current (8/20 μs)

Imax

Rated frequency Voltage protection level

fn Up

Arrester classification

Response time

Quenching follow-current

Ifi

Max. backup fuse gG / gL Degree of protection Mounting on “U” rail according to EN – type Connection Conductor rigid (solid, stranded) Conductor flexible Torque Top or bottom connection Optical signalling Functional state Non-functional state Remote signalling Arrangement of contacts 1) Max. voltage / current Umax / Imax

peak value Ipeakl charge Q specific energy W/R L-N N-PE L-PEN L-N N-PE L-PEN L-N N-PE L-PEN according to EN 61643-11 according to IEC 61643-1 according to VDE 0675-6 L-N N-PE L-PEN L-N N-PE L-PEN

+

+

2.5 ÷ 35 mm2 2.5 ÷ 25 mm2 4.5 Nm yes

2.5 ÷ 35 mm2 2.5 ÷ 25 mm2 4.5 Nm yes

2.5 ÷ 35 mm2 2.5 ÷ 25 mm2 3.5 Nm yes

2.5 ÷ 35 mm2 2.5 ÷ 25 mm2 3.5 Nm yes

green colour red

green colour red

green colour red

-

001 250 V a.c. / 1 A 125 V d.c. / 0.2 A 0.12 VA (12 V. 10 mA) 0.14 ÷ 1.5 mm2 0.25 Nm

001 250 V a.c. / 1 A 125 V d.c. / 0.2 A 0.12 VA (12 V. 10 mA) 0.14 ÷ 1.5 mm2 0.25 Nm

001 250 V a.c. / 0.5 A 125 V d.c. / 0.2 A 0.12 VA (12 V. 10 mA) 0.14 ÷ 1.5 mm2 0.25 Nm

-

-40 ÷ 80 °C arbitrary

-40 ÷ 80 °C arbitrary

-40 ÷ 80 °C arbitrary

Min. switched power Connection – conductor (rigid, flexible) Torque Operating conditions Ambient temperature -40 ÷ 80 °C Working position arbitrary 1) Each digit indicates successively the number of make, break and break-make contacts

D10

+

+


Minia

Overvoltage protections

+

COMBINED LIGHTNING CURRENT AND SURGE VOLTAGE ARRESTERS - TYPE 1 + TYPE 2 Dimensions ~8

SJBC-25E-3N-MZS

45

12 11 14

107.1

5.5

142.8

90

12 11 14

~7

SJBC-25E-3-MZS

43.5 64

SVBC-...

45 7

17.5

90

~99.5

14 11 12

~9

~11

44 69

Diagram SJBC-25E-3-MZS

SJBC-25E-3N-MZS 12 11 14

12 11 14 N

L1

L2

L3

L1

SVBC-12,5-1-S

SVBC-12,5-1

SVBC-50-N

L/N ( )

L/N ( )

N( )

(L/N)

(N)

(L/N)

12 11 14

L2

L3

D11


Minia

Overvoltage protections

SURGE VOLTAGE ARRESTERS - TYPE 2 „For protection of electric networks and equipment

„It reduces voltage and „cut up“ the overvoltage wave

against overvoltage from indirect lightning strokes. „For protection against overvoltage caused by atmospheric disturbances and from switching processes in networks. „For protection of common wiring in apartments, commercial buildings etc.

power caused by indirect lightning stroke and or switching processes in the networks. „Use: - as the second stage (medium protection) in 3-stage overvoltage protection - type 2 according to EN 61643-11

Surge voltage arresters SVC in fixed design „Surge voltage arresters designed for building,

„Remote and visual signalling of the shut-down device

residential, commercial and similar installations classed in group „low installation threat“. „For four-wire TN-C network, use 3 pcs SVC-275-1(-S), and for five-wire TN-S, TT network use the combination 3 pcs SVC-275-1(-S) + 1 pc SVC-255-N-S. „Main component is varistor, able to arrest lightning current up to 40 kA (8/20 μs). „Possibility of mounting in casual distribution board and switchboard cabinets Distri.

state (after disconnection the surge voltage arrester is non-functional and it must be replaced). „Remote signalling of state is provided in type ...-S „Surge voltage arresters SVC-275-... replace the designs of overvoltage protections of the 2nd type SVL-275..., shown in the catalogue Modular devices Minia (N1- 2008-C).The replacements are shown in details in the conversion table at the end of the chapter. „Possibility of easy interconnection with circuit breakers LPE, LPN by means of interconnecting busbar.

Connection between L-PEN, L-PE, L-N

Design

Type

without remote signalling SVC-275-1 with remote signalling SVC-275-1-S

Summing spark gap SVC-255-N-S „Surge voltage arrester designed especially for connection 3+1 or 1+1. „Use as a summary spark gap between N and PE in TN-S or TT network (connection „3+1“ or „1+1”). „Main component is a power arrester, able to arrest lightning current up to 50 kA (8/20 μs).

Connection between N-PE

Design

Type

with remote signalling

SVC-255-N-S

Product code 38842 38843

Number of modules 1 1

Weight [kg] 0.095 0.100

Package [pcs] 1 1

„Possibility of mounting in casual distribution board and

switchboard cabinets Distri. „Remote and visual signalling of the shut-down device

state (after disconnection the surge voltage arrester is non-functional and it must be replaced). „Possibility of easy interconnection with circuit breakers LPE, LPN by means of interconnecting busbar.

Product code 38844

Number of modules 1

Weight [kg] 0.100

Package [pcs] 1

Surge voltage arresters SVC with a replaceable module (multipole) „Remote and visual signalling of the shut-down device residential, commercial and similar installations state (after disconnection the surge voltage arrester is classed in group „low installation threat“. non-functional and the replaceable module must be replaced). „For four-wire TN-C network, use SVC-350-3-MZ(S), and for five-wire TN-S, TT network use SVC-350-3N-MZ(S). „Remote signalling of state is provided in type ...-MZS. „Main component is varistor, able to arrest lightning „Surge voltage arresters SVC-350-... replace the designs current up to 40 kA (8/20 μs). of overvoltage protections SVL-275..., shown in the „Possibility of mounting in casual distribution board and catalogue Modular devices Minia (N1-2008-C ). The switchboard cabinets Distri. replacements are shown in details in the conversion table at the end of the chapter. „Design two-part device consisting of a base and „Possibility of easy interconnection with circuit breakers replaceable module with a varistor. In case of a failure LPE, LPN by means of interconnecting busbar. it is sufficient to replace the module by a new one without the need of turning the device off. „Surge voltage arresters designed for building,

D12

Network

Design

Type

TN-C (3L + PEN) TN-S (3L + N+ PE )

without remote signalling with remote signalling without remote signalling with remote signalling

SVC-350-3-MZ SVC-350-3-MZS SVC-350-3N-MZ SVC-350-3N-MZS

Product code 38365 38366 38367 38368

Number of modules 3 3 4 4

Weight [kg] 0.393 0.403 0.433 0.443

Package [pcs] 1 1 1 1


Minia

Overvoltage protections

SURGE VOLTAGE ARRESTERS - TYPE 2 Overvoltage protections SVM with removable module „Surge voltage arresters for demanding applications, industry, power engineering etc. „Use mainly in combination with SJBplus-50-2.5, if the length of the line between T1 and T2 is shorter than 5 m. „Main component is varistor, able to arrest lightning current up to 40 kA (8/20 μs). „Possibility of mounting in casual distribution board and switchboard cabinets Distri. „Design two-part device consisting of a base and replaceable module with a varistor. In case of a failure it is sufficient to replace the module by a new one without the need of turning the device off.

Connection between L-PEN, L-PE, L-N

Design

Type

without remote signalling SVM-440-Z with remote signalling SVM-440-ZS

Summing spark gap SVM-NPE-Z „Surge voltage arrester designed especially for connection 3+1 or 1+1. „Use as a summary spark gap between N and PE in TN-S or TT network (connection „3+1“ or „1+1“). „Main component is a power arrester, able to arrest lightning current up to 40 kA (8/20 μs). „Possibility of mounting in casual distribution board and switchboard cabinets Distri.

Connection between N-PE

Design

Type

without remote signalling SVM-NPE-Z

„Remote and visual signalling of the shut-down device

state (after disconnection the lightning current arrester is non-functional and the replaceable module must be replaced). „Remote signalling of state is provided in type ...-ZS. „Possibility of easy interconnection with circuit breakers LPE, LPN by means of interconnecting busbar.

Product code 34720 34721

Number of modules 1 1

Weight [kg] 0.136 0.143

Package [pcs] 1 1

„Visual signalling of the shut-down device state (after

disconnection the lightning current arrester is nonfunctional and the replaceable module must be replaced). „Possibility of easy interconnection with circuit breakers LPE, LPN by means of interconnecting busbar.

Product code 34723

Number of modules 1

Weight [kg] 0.130

Package [pcs] 1

Accessories Interconnecting busbars Terminal extensions

G1L-.., G2L-.., G3L-.., G4L-.., S1L-.., S2L-.., S3L-.., S4L-.. AS-..., CS-FH000.., N3x10-FH000

page E52 page E57

D13


Minia

Overvoltage protections

SURGE VOLTAGE ARRESTERS - TYPE 2 Specifications Type Standards

SVC-275-1 SVC-275-1-S

SVC-255-N-S

SVC-350-3-MZ SVC-350-3-MZS

SVC-350-3N-MZ SVM-440-Z SVC-350-3N-MZS SVM-440-ZS

SVM-NPE-Z

EN 61643-11 IEC 61643-1 VDE 0675-6

EN 61643-11 IEC 61643-1 VDE 0675-6

EN 61643-11 IEC 61643-1 VDE 0675-6

EN 61643-11 IEC 61643-1 VDE 0675-6

EN 61643-11 IEC 61643-1 VDE 0675-6

EN 61643-11 IEC 61643-1 VDE 0675-6

230 V a.c. 255 V a.c. 30 kA 50 kA 50/60 Hz ≤ 1.3 kV type 2 class II class C ≤ 100 ns IP20 TH 35

230 V /400 V a.c. 350 V a.c. 20 kA / pole 20 kA / pole 40 kA / pole 40 kA / pole 50/60 Hz ≤ 1.4 kV ≤ 1.4 kV type 2 class II class C ≤ 25 ns ≤ 25 ns 125 A IP20 TH 35

230 V /400 V a.c. 350 V a.c. (L-N) 264 V a.c. (N-PE) 20 kA / pole 20 kA 40 kA / pole 40 kA 50/60 Hz ≤ 1.4 kV ≤ 1.5 kV type 2 class II class C ≤ 25 ns ≤ 100 ns 125 A IP20 TH 35

400 V a.c. 440 V a.c. 585 V d.c. 20 kA 20 kA 40 kA 40 kA 50/60 Hz ≤ 2.2 kV ≤ 2.2 kV type 2 class II class C ≤ 25 ns ≤ 25 ns 125 A IP20 TH 35

230 V a.c. 260 V a.c. 20 kA 40 kA 50/60 Hz ≤ 1 kV type 2 class II class C ≤ 100 ns IP20 TH 35

0.5 ÷ 25 mm2 0.5 ÷ 16 mm2 2 Nm yes

0.5 ÷ 25 mm2 0.5 ÷ 16 mm2 2 Nm yes

0.5 ÷ 35 mm2 0.5 ÷ 25 mm2 4.5 Nm only bottom

0.5 ÷ 35 mm2 0.5 ÷ 25 mm2 4.5 Nm only bottom

0.5 ÷ 35 mm2 0.5 ÷ 25 mm2 4.5 Nm yes

0.5 ÷ 35 mm2 0.5 ÷ 25 mm2 4.5 Nm yes

green colour red

green colour red

transparent colour red

transparent colour red

transparent colour red

transparent colour red

001 250 V a.c. / 1 A 125 V d.c. / 0.2 A 0.12 VA (12 V. 10 mA) 0.14 ÷ 1.5 mm2 0.25 Nm

001 250 V a.c. / 1 A 125 V d.c. / 0.2 A 0.12 VA (12 V. 10 mA) 0.14 ÷ 1.5 mm2 0.25 Nm

001 250 V a.c. / 1 A 125 V d.c. / 0.2 A 0.12 VA (12 V. 10 mA) 0.14 ÷ 1.5 mm2 0.25 Nm

001 250 V a.c. / 1 A 125 V d.c. / 0.2 A 0.12 VA (12 V. 10 mA) 0.14 ÷ 1.5 mm2 0.25 Nm

001 250 V a.c. / 1 A 125 V d.c. / 0.2 A 0.12 VA (12 V / 10 mA) 0.14 ÷ 1.5 mm2 0.25 Nm -

-25 ÷ 45 °C arbitrary

-40 ÷ 80 °C arbitrary

-40 ÷ 80 °C arbitrary

-40 ÷ 85 °C arbitrary

Approval marks Rated voltage UN Maximum constant operating voltage UC Rated discharge current (8/20 μs)

In

Maximum discharge current (8/20 μs) Imax

Rated frequency Voltage protection level

fn Up

Arrester classification

Response time

Max. backup fuse gG / gL Degree of protection Mounting on “U” rail according to EN – type Connection Conductor rigid (solid, stranded) Conductor flexible Torque Top or bottom connection Optical signalling Functional state Non-functional state Remote signalling Arrangement of contacts 1) Max. voltage / current Umax / Imax

230 V a.c. 275 V a.c. 350 V d.c. L-N 20 kA N-PE L-PEN 20 kA L-N 40 kA N-PE L-PEN 40 kA 50/60 Hz L-N ≤ 1.35 kV N-PE L-PEN ≤ 1.35 kV according to EN 61643-11 type 2 according to IEC 61643-1 class II according to VDE 0675-6 class C L-N ≤ 25 ns N-PE L-PEN ≤ 25 ns 125 A IP20 TH 35

Min. switched power Connection – conductor (rigid, flexible) Torque Operating conditions Ambient temperature -25 ÷ 45 °C Working position arbitrary 1) Each digit indicates successively the number of make, break and break-make contacts

D14

-40 ÷ 85 °C arbitrary


Minia

Overvoltage protections

SURGE VOLTAGE ARRESTERS - TYPE 2 Dimensions SVM-... 12 11 14

45

~97

45 ~4.5

17.5

86

~95

~7

12 11 14

~8

44

17.5

5.5

43.5

62

58

SVC-350-3N-MZ SVC-350-3N-MZS 14 11 12

45

9

14 11 12

5.5

70

52.5

90

SVC-350-3-MZ SVC-350-3-MZS

90

~5.5

~7

SVC-275-... SVC-255-...

43.5 64

Diagram SVC-275-1

SVC-275-1-S

L/N ( )

L/N ( ) 12 11 14

(L/ N )

SVC-255-N-S

SVM-440-Z

(L/ N )

SVC-350-3-MZ

L/N ( ) 12 11 14

(L/ N )

(N )

SVM-NPE-Z

SVM-440-ZS

L/N ( )

N ( ) 12 11 14

N( )

(L/ N )

(N)

SVC-350-3N-MZ

SVC-350-3-MZS

SVC-350-3N-MZS

12 11 14

L1

L2

L3

12 11 14

L1

L2

L3

L1

L2

L3

N

L1

L2

L3

N

D15


Minia

Overvoltage protections

SURGE VOLTAGE ARRESTERS - TYPE 3 „For protection of electric networks and equipment

against overvoltage from indirect lightning strokes. „For protection against overvoltage caused by atmospheric disturbances and from switching processes in networks. „For protection of common wiring in apartments, houses, commercial buildings etc. „It reduces voltage and „cut up“ the overvoltage wave power caused by indirect lightning stroke and or switching processes in the networks.

„Use: as the third stage (fine protection) in 3-stage overvol-

tage protection – type 3 according to EN 61643-11. „For further information on OEZ offer of overvoltage pro-

tection see „Overvoltage protections – Application manual”.

Surge voltage arresters SVD „Surge voltage arresters designed for protection

„Design two-part device consisting of a base and

of overvoltage sensitive devices. „Use mainly in networks TN-S, TT. If used in TN-C network it is necessary to connect terminals N and PE. „SVD-253-1N-MZS is intended for single-phase distribution systems and SVD-335-3N-MZS for three-phase distribution systems. „Main component is varistor, able to arrest lightning current in 2-pole design up to 10 kA (8/20 μs) and in 4-pole design up to 4.5 kA (8/20 μs). „Possibility of mounting in casual distribution board and switchboard cabinets Distri.

replaceable module with a varistor. In case of a failure it is sufficient to replace the module by a new one without the need of turning the device off. „Remote and visual signalling of the shut-down device state (after disconnection the surge voltage arrester is non-functional and the replaceable module must be replaced). „Surge voltage arrester SVD-253-1N-MZS replaces the „black“ SVD-250M-ZS shown in the catalogue Modular devices MINIA (N1-2008-A). The replacements are shown in details in the conversion table at the end of the chapter.

Design for network single-phase three-phase

D16

Type SVD-253-1N-MZS SVD-335-3N-MZS

Product code 38371 38372

Number of modules 1 2

Weight [kg] 0.081 0.129

Package [pcs] 1 1


Overvoltage protections

Minia

SURGE VOLTAGE ARRESTERS - TYPE 3 Specifications Type

SVD-253-1N-MZS

SVD-335-3N-MZS

Standards

EN 61643-11 IEC 61643-1 VDE 0675-6

EN 61643-11 IEC 61643-1 VDE 0675-6

230 V a.c. 253 V a.c. 3 kA 3 kA 10 kA 10 kA 10 kA 26 A 6 kV 50/60 Hz ≤ 1.1 kV ≤ 1.5 kV ≤ 1.5 kV type 3 class III class D ≤ 25 ns ≤ 100 ns 25 A IP20 TH 35

230/400 V a.c. 335 V a.c. 255 V a.c. 1.5 kA / pole 1.5 kA 1.5 kA 4.5 kA 4.5 kA 10 kA 26 A 4 kV 50/60 Hz ≤ 1.2 kV ≤ 1.5 kV ≤ 1.5 kV type 3 class III class D ≤ 25 ns ≤ 100 ns 25 A IP20 TH 35

transparent colour red

transparent colour red

01 250 V a.c. / 3 A 50 V d.c. / 3 A

01 250 V a.c. / 3 A 50 V d.c. / 3 A

0.2 ÷ 4 mm2 0.2 ÷ 2.5 mm2 0.8 Nm only bottom

0.2 ÷ 4 mm2 0.2 ÷ 2.5 mm2 0.8 Nm only bottom

-40 ÷ 85 °C arbitrary

-40 ÷ 85 °C arbitrary

Approval marks Rated voltage Maximum constant operating voltage

UN UC

Rated discharge current (8/20 μs)

In

Maximum discharge current (8/20 μs)

Imax

Rated loading current at 30 °C Off -load voltage Rated frequency Voltage protection level

IL Uoc fn Up

Arrester classification

Response time Max. backup circuit breaker (C) or fuse gG / gL Degree of protection Mounting on “U” rail according to EN – type Optical signalling Functional state Non-functional state Remote signalling Arrangement of contacts 1) Max. voltage / current

L-N N-PE L-N L-PE N-PE L-N L-PE N-PE

L-N L-PE N-PE according to EN 61643-11 according to IEC 61643-1 according to VDE 0675-6 L-N L-PE

Umax / Imax

Connection Conductor rigid (solid, stranded) Conductor flexible Torque Top or bottom connection Operating conditions Ambient temperature Working position 1) Each digit indicates successively the number of make and break contacts

D17


Minia

Overvoltage protections

SURGE VOLTAGE ARRESTERS - TYPE 3 Dimensions SVD-253-1N-MZS N

8 L2 10 L3

45

L

6 4 N 2 11 12

L1

3 5 1

L N

17.7

L1 N

5 1 3

7 9

90

2 4 6 12 11

SVD-335-3N-MZS

L2 L3

35.4

7

44 58

Diagram SVD-335-3N-MZS

SVD-253-1N-MZS 5/L

1/N

6/L

2/N 11

11

3/

4/

5 / L1

6 / L1

7 / L2

8 / L2

12 IN

OUT

1/N

2/N

3/

4/

D18

IN

12 9 / L3

10 / L3

OUT


Minia

Overvoltage protections

SURGE VOLTAGE ARRESTERS FOR PHOTOVOLTAIC SYSTEMS „For protection of electric networks and equipment

„Use:

against overvoltage from indirect lightning strokes. „For protection against overvoltage caused by atmospheric disturbances and from switching processes in networks. „For protection of parts of photovoltaic sources mainly on their DC side. „It reduces voltage and „cut up“ the overvoltage wave power caused by indirect lightning stroke and or switching processes in the networks.

- as the second stage (medium protection) against overvoltage – type 2 according to EN 61643-11. „For further information on OEZ offer for photovoltaic systems see catalogue „Protective and switching devices of photovoltaic sources””.

Surge voltage arresters SVF „Surge voltage arresters intended for building,

residential, commercial and similar installations, part of which are DC applications (e.g. photovoltaic source). „For applications with maximum operating voltage up to 1000 V type SVF-1000-2VB-MZ(S) is used, for applications with maximum operating voltage up to 600 V type SVF-600-3V-MZ(S) is used. „Type SVF-1000-2VB-MZ(S) provides galvanical insulation from the ground. It is therefore convenient for insulated systems. „Main components are varistors connected in “Y”. In type 1000 V there is lightning arrester on the place of varistor between the common bus and ground that limits the arrested current.

„Possibility of mounting in casual distribution board and

switchboard cabinets Distri. „Design multipart, consisting of a base and replaceable

modules. The modules can be removed in case of measurement or failure without necessity of device disconnection. „Remote and visual signalling of the shut-down device state (after disconnection the lightning current arrester is non-functional and the replaceable module must be replaced). „Remote signalling of state is provided in type ...-MZS.

Uoc max

Design

Type

1000 V d.c. 1000 V d.c. 600 V d.c. 600 V d.c.

without remote signalling with remote signalling without remote signalling with remote signalling

SVF-1000-2VB-MZ SVF-1000-2VB-MZS SVF-600-3V-MZ SVF-600-3V-MZS

Product code 39165 39527 39528 39529

Number of modules 3 3 3 3

Weight [kg] 0.344 0.347 0.322 0.325

Package [pcs] 1 1 1 1

Accessories Terminal extensions

AS-.., CS-FH000.., N3x10-FH000

page E57

D19


Minia

Overvoltage protections

SURGE VOLTAGE ARRESTERS FOR PHOTOVOLTAIC SYSTEMS Specifications Type Standards

SVF-1000-2VB-MZ SVF-1000-2VB-MZS

SVF-600-3V-MZ SVF-600-3V-MZS

EN 61643-11 IEC 61643-1 IEC 60364-7-712

EN 61643-11 IEC 61643-1 IEC 60364-7-712

1000 V d.c. 80 A 1000 V d.c. 15 kA 30 kA ≤ 5 kV ≤ 3 kV ≤ 4.5 kV ≤ 2.5 kV ≤ 4 kV ≤ 2 kV < 1 μA < 1 mW ≤ 2.5 kV / ≤ 3 kV ≤ 25 ns type 2 class II class C IP20 TH 35

600 V d.c. without limits 600 V d.c. 15 kA 40 kA ≤ 3 kV ≤ 3 kV ≤ 2.5 kV ≤ 2.5 kV < 20 μA < 12 mW ≤ 3 kV / ≤ 25 ns type 2 class II class C IP20 TH 35

1.5 ÷ 35 mm2 1.5 ÷ 25 mm2 4.5 Nm -

1.5 ÷ 35 mm2 1.5 ÷ 25 mm2 4.5 Nm -

transparent colour red colour

transparent colour red colour

001 250 V a.c. / 1 A 125 V d.c. / 0.2 A 0.12 VA (12 V, 10 mA) 0.14 ÷ 1.5 mm2 0.25 Nm

001 250 V a.c. / 1 A 125 V d.c. / 0.2 A 0.12 VA (12 V, 10 mA) 0.14 ÷ 1.5 mm2 0.25 Nm

-40 ÷ 80 °C arbitrary

-40 ÷ 80 °C arbitrary

Approval marks Max. off -load voltage Max. short-circuit current Maximum constant operating voltage Rated discharge current (8/20 μs) Maximum discharge current (8/20 μs) Voltage protection level

Uoc max Isc max UC In Imax Up

L+, L(L+/L-), PE L+, L(L+/L-), PE L+, L(L+/L-), PE L+, PE / L-, PE

In 15 kA In 10 kA In 5 kA

IPE Earth-leakage current at Uc Pc Still stand power input Voltage protection levels of the individual modules Up Response time Arrester classification

Degree of protection Mounting on “U” rail according to EN – type Connection Conductor rigid (solid, stranded) Conductor flexible Torque Top or bottom connection Optical signalling Functional state Non-functional state Remote signalling Arrangement of contacts 1) Max. voltage / current

In 15 kA

varistor / arrester according to EN 61643-11 according to IEC 61643-1 according to VDE 0675-6

Umax / Imax

Min. switched power Connection – conductor (rigid, flexible) Torque Operating conditions Ambient temperature Working position 1) Each digit indicates successively the number of make, break and break-make contacts

Dimensions

Diagram

SVF-1000-2VB-MZ

12

11

14

SVF-1000-2VB-MZS

SVF-...

45

90

14 11 12

L+

L-

SVF-600-3V-MZ

52.5

5.5

L+

12

11

14

L-

SVF-600-3V-MZS

43.5 64

L+

LL+

D20

L-


Overvoltage protections

Minia

REPLACEABLE MODULES Newly produced Connection devices between SJB-25E-3-MZS L-PEN SJB-25E-3N-MZS L-N T1 SJB-25E-3N-MZS N-PE SJBC-25E-3-MZS L-PEN SJBC-25E-3N-MZS L-N SJBC-25E-3-MZS L-PEN T1 + T2 SJBC-25E-3N-MZS L-N SJB-25E-3N-MZS N-PE SVC-350-3-MZ(S) L-PEN T2 SVC-350-3N-MZ(S) L-N SVC-350-3N-MZ(S) N-PE SVM-440-ZS L-PEN; L-N T2 SVM-NPE-Z N-PE SVD-253-1N-MZS L-N; N-PE T3 SVD-335-3N-MZS L-N; N-PE SVF-600-3V-MZ(S) X-L+;X-L-;X-PE T2 - FV SVF-1000-2VB-MZ X-L+; X-LSVF-1000-2VB-MZ X-PE X = common connection bus Y at SVF-1000-..

T2 T3

Formerly produced devices SVM275-Z(S) SVM440-Z(S) SVM260/NPE-Z SVD250M-ZS

Connection between L-PEN; L-N L-PEN; L-N N-PE L-N; N-PE

Spare module SJB-25E-1-M SJB-25E-1-M SJB-100E-N-M SJB-N25E-1-M SJB-N25E-1-M SVC-N350-1-M SVC-N350-1-M SJB-100E-N-M SVC-350-1-M SVC-350-1-M SVC-264-N-M SVM-440 SVM-NPE SVD-253-1N-M SVD-335-3N-M SVF-600-V-M SVF-1000-V-M SVF-1000-B-M

Spare module SVM275 SVM440 SVM260/NPE SVD250M

Product code 38360 38360 38359 38363 38363 38364 38364 38359 38369 38369 38370 34722 34724 38373 38374 39530 39166 39167

Number of modules 2.00 2.00 2.00 1.33 1.33 0.66 0.66 2.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 2.00 1.00 1.00 1.00

Weight [kg] 0.2400 0.2400 0.2400 0.1290 0.1290 0.0520 0.0520 0.2400 0.0510 0.0510 0.0400 0.0490 0.0390 0.0270 0.0430 0.0717 0.0826 0.0454

Package [pcs] 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 20 20 20

Product code 13003 18564 14427 13021

Number of modules 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00

Weight [kg] 0.045 0.060 0.045 0.022

Package [pcs] 1 1 1 1

Replacement of module

D21


Minia

Overvoltage protections

RECOMMENDATIONS FOR DESIGN, INSTALLATION AND MEASUREMENT OF OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTIONS Conversion tables of former and new designs Formerly produced devices Type designation SJBplus-50-1,5 SJBplus50/1,5 SJBplus-50 SJBplus50

ID 34715 14423 34714 14424

SJBpro-35-1,5

34713

SJBpro35/1,5

14422

SJBpro-35

34712

SJBpro35

13019

SJB100/NPE/1,5 SVM440-Z SVM440-ZS

14425 18565 18566

SVM-275-Z

34717

SVM275-Z

13004

SVM-275-ZS

34718

Type 2

SVM275-ZS

13005

Type 3

SVM260/NPE-Z SVL-275 SVL275 SVL-275-S SVL275S SJL275 SJL275S SVL-NPE-S SVD-250M-ZS SVD250M-ZS

14426 37405 07439 37406 07440 07441 07442 37410 34725 13020

Type 1

Newly produced devices Type designation

SJBplus-50-2,5 SJBplus-50-2,5 SJBplus-50-2,5 SJBplus-50-2,5 SJB-25E-3-MZS SJB-25E-3N-MZS SJB-25E-3-MZS SJB-25E-3N-MZS SJB-25E-3-MZS SJB-25E-3N-MZS SJB-25E-3-MZS SJB-25E-3N-MZS SJB-NPE-1,5 SVM-440-Z SVM-440-ZS SVC-350-3-MZ SVC-350-3N-MZ SVC-350-3-MZ SVC-350-3N-MZ SVC-350-3-MZS SVC-350-3N-MZS SVC-350-3-MZS SVC-350-3N-MZS SVM-NPE-Z SVC-275-1 SVC-275-1 SVC-275-1-S SVC-275-1-S SVC-275-1 SVC-275-1-S SVC-255-N-S SVD-253-1N-MZS SVD-253-1N-MZS

Note

ID 39227 39227 39227 39227 38357 38358 38357 38358 38357 38358 38357 38358 34716 34720 34721 38365 38367 38365 38367 38366 38368 38366 38368 34723 38842 38842 38843 38843 38842 38843 38844 38371 38371

adequate design adequate design innovation - electronic ignition spark gap innovation - electronic ignition spark gap multipole design (3+0; TN-C) multipole design (3+1; TN-S, TT) multipole design (3+0; TN-C) multipole design (3+1; TN-S, TT) multipole design (3+0; TN-C) multipole design (3+1; TN-S, TT) multipole design (3+0; TN-C) multipole design (3+1; TN-S, TT) adequate design adequate design adequate design multipole design (3+0; TN-C) multipole design (3+1; TN-S, TT) multipole design (3+0; TN-C) multipole design (3+1; TN-S, TT) multipole design (3+0; TN-C) multipole design (3+1; TN-S, TT) multipole design (3+0; TN-C) multipole design (3+1; TN-S, TT) adequate design adequate design adequate design adequate design adequate design higher In, higher Imax higher In, higher Imax adequate design adequate design adequate design

Varistor function test „Varistor is able to provide protection against overvol-

„Standard EN 62 305-4 requires besides others also

„If the deducted voltage level is in between the Voltage

tage repeatedly. However, every such actuating changes its structure to certain extent. We can detect by timely varistor check whether is this change of structure and resulting varistor function already beyond the acceptable limit or not.

periodic overvoltage protections checks. This check is usually completed with varistor measurement. „On principle, the check of overvoltage protections is carried out by connecting to the DC voltage, while increasing the voltage to the point when current 1 mA flows through the arrester. Subsequently the voltage level is deducted. This is carried out repeatedly also for the opposite polarity.

tolerance zone given in the table, the overvoltage protection is functional. In the opposite case it is necessary to replace the overvoltage protection or its module. The table of Voltage tolerance zones is given below.

Table of tolerance zones at 1 mA Type designation SVBC-12,5-1 SVBC-12,5-1-S SVC-275-1 SVC-275-1-S SVC-350-3-MZ SVC-350-3-MZS SVC-350-3N-MZ SVC-350-3N-MZS SVC-350-1-M SVM-440-Z SVM-440-ZS SVM-440 SVF-1000-2VB-MZ SVF-1000-2VB-MZS SVF-600-3V-MZ SVF-600-3V-MZS SVF-1000-V-M SVF-600-V-M

D22

Product code 39027 38945 38842 38843 38365 38366 38367 38368 38369 34720 34721 34722 39165 39527 39528 39529 39166 39530

Voltage tolerance zone at 1 mA 459 - 561 V 459 - 561 V 459 - 561 V 459 - 561 V 509 - 621 V 509 - 621 V 509 - 621 V 509 - 621 V 509 - 621 V 644 - 786 V 644 - 786 V 644 - 786 V 960 - 1056 V 960 - 1056 V 558 - 682 V 558 - 682 V 960 - 1056 V 558 - 682 V

Type designation

(formerly produced devices) SVL-275 SVL-275-S SVM-275-Z SVM-275-ZS SVM-275 SVL275 SVL275S SVM275-Z SVM275-ZS SVM275 SVM440-Z SVM440-ZS SVM440

Product code 37405 37406 34717 34718 34719 07439 07440 13004 13005 13003 18565 18566 18564

Voltage tolerance zone at 1 mA 459 - 561 V 459 - 561 V 387 - 473 V 387 - 473 V 387 - 473 V 459 - 561 V 459 - 561 V 387 - 473 V 387 - 473 V 387 - 473 V 644 - 786 V 644 - 786 V 644 - 786 V


Minia

Overvoltage protections

RECOMMENDATIONS FOR DESIGN, INSTALLATION AND MEASUREMENT OF OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTIONS General „Protection of buildings and electrical equipment against lightning effects and overvoltage is carried out both outside and inside the building. Еxternal protection devices include lightning traps, conductor arresters, earthing systems, discharge arresters etc. internal protection measures include equipotential bonding, screening etc. „The basis of internal protection against lightning effects and overvoltage is protective equipotential bonding, i.e. connection of all metallic wiring to an equipotential EP busbar (EP – equipotential point). This eliminates potential differences in the wiring over a permissible limit with subsequent damaging discharge. „Lightning current arresters and surge voltage arresters are the elements of internal protection. They connect power cables to the EP busbar indirectly through arrester gaps and varistors and thus reduce overvoltage. The overvoltage reduction is normally carried out in 3 stages, while each stage has to reduce overvoltage. The degree of reduction is defined by overvoltage categories according to EN 60664-1. The arrester stages 1 to 3 are installed on the interface of individual overvoltage categories – see Fig. 1.

„Stage 1 – coarse protection – type 1

– type 1 + type 2 + SJBC devices are compact combined arresters of type 1 and type 2. They provide advantages of rough and medium protection stages described in the previous and subsequent paragraphs in one device. The first and second stages are based on the arrester gap and varistor respectively. Their installation in one base is possible thanks to the technology of electronic ignition release.This solution will be used in case of placement of the 1st and 2nd protection stages in one switchboard. Also SVBC is part of this group. It is also combined arrester type 1 and 2. However, both stages are varistor based. On the contrary to SJBC the type SVBC can arrest lightning current only half of the value. For most applications this „lower output“ is sufficient. „Stage 2 – medium protection – type 2

This protection is provided by varistor-based surge voltage arresters SVC and SVM, which are able to divert atmospheric surges or overvoltage from switching processes in the network with wave form 8/20 μs without damage. In most cases they are installed after the lightning current arresters, which reduce overvoltage and „cut off“ the energy of the overvoltage wave. In particular applications it can be installed in the main switchboard even without the back-up 1. protection stage. For more information on the selection of optimal solution see table Selection of the number of protection stages and types on the following page. See Fig. 2 for comparison of the energies diverted by the lightning current arrester 50 kA and surge voltage arrester 15 kA. Apparently, the value of pulse current is not sufficient to compare the output of overvoltage protections without the information on test wave type.

Iimp, In [kA]

This protection is provided by lightning current arresters SJB, which arrest the biggest part of the overvoltage wave, and are able to divert lightning currents or their substantial parts without damage. It is possible to deduct from EN 62305-4 that in the most adverse case with 2-wire power lead the lightning current arresters must arrest up to 50 kA per pole. In case of 4-wire power lead it is 25 kA per pole of impulse current with the waveform 10/350 μs. They can achieve these parameters, because they are designed on the spark gap basis.

„1st + 2nd stage – compact combined arrester

lift

Surge voltage arresters are rated for a specific heat output. If there is high power or too frequent overvoltage in the network, the heat output can be exceeded and the surge voltage arrester is disconnected by its thermal disconnecting device. After disconnection the surge voltage arresters are non-functional and it is necessary to replace them or their module. The disconnection is indicated optically or also remotely. The disconnection is indicated optically or remotely. At insulation measurement it is necessary to disconnect the arresters to get undistorted results. „Stage 3 – fine protection – type 3

To ensure really reliable protection it is necessary to complement the above stages 1 and 2 by the last stage – type 3 (SVD). The basic elements of the fine protection are varistors and suppressor diodes able to divert the overvoltage with wave form 8/20 μs. It is recommended to install this protection directly at the protected appliance, without a long cable between the arrester and the appliance. In case there is a long line between the last stage and the appliance the voltage in the conductors could rise over a permissible level (e.g. due to induction). We recommend to install this stage of protection to the power outlets that feed the overvoltage sensitive appliances (etc. electronics). „Surge voltage arresters for photovoltaic system

The principle of devices protection in applications of photovoltaic sources (600/1000 V d.c.) is similar to the LV network protection 230/400 V. It is mainly the reduction of energy of overvoltage wave that is caused by lightning stroke or by switching processes in the network. The overvoltage protection is usually installed at the solar panel. At the length of the line between solar panels and inverter L > 10 m we recommend to install the overvoltage protection also at the inverter on the DC side.

15 kA (8/20 μs) 50

50 kA (10/350 μs)

flats

25

Uimp (1.2/50 μs)

appliances 6 kV Overvoltage category IV Outside lead

15 7.5

4 kV Overvoltage category III Fixed wiring

2,5 kV

1,5 kV

Overvoltage Overvoltage category II category I Appliances Light-current appliance

Fig. 1. Overvoltage categories and impulse withstand voltage Uimp (1.2/50 μs) for individual parts of a building and for rated voltage 230/400 V a.c. – according to EN 60664-1 equivalent IEC 664-1

20

100

200

300

350

400

t [μs]

Fig. 2. Wave form and energy 8/20 μs and 10/350 μs (the arrested energy corresponds to the area below the curve)

D23


Minia

Overvoltage protections

RECOMMENDATIONS FOR DESIGN, INSTALLATION AND MEASUREMENT OF OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTIONS Recommended procedure of design of overvoltage protection in low-voltage distribution system The design of overvoltage protection in a low-voltage distribution system is solved by the set of standards EN 62305. Firstly the zones of protection against lightning are determined, risk of damage, lightning protection level, values of lightning currents etc. Secondly the types of overvoltage protections are selected and their placing. The final decision to undergo certain level of risk, however, is still in the hands of investors. In order to roughly determine what type of protection should be installed if any, you can follow this procedure.

of the number of protection stages and types you should first find corresponding risk (high, medium or small) for the installation in the building, to be protected, and after it determine corresponding sensitivity (big, medium or small) of appliances which are installed in the building. The intersection gives the required information i.e. the number of stages and protection type. Note that the best and safest solution is installation of all three protection stages.

2) Selection of overvoltage protections It consists in two steps, in particular: 1) Selection of the number of protection stages and types 2) Selection of overvoltage protections Note: recommended procedure can not cover all possible cases, it shows the basic logic to follow.

1) Selection of the number of protection stages and types – this is one of the main and the first decisive criterion in designing overvoltage protection. In the table Selection

Selection of T1 and T2 From the previous paragraph, the number of protection stages and types is known, and not it is necessary to determine specific products. If both T1 and T2 are selected for protection, use the table „Selection of overvoltage protections T1 and T2“ , which is divided by other important criteria, such as value of the quenching follow-current, network type etc. If protection T1 is not chosen, it is possible

to select protection T2 arbitrarily, depending on utilization properties of individual offered types (SVC, SVM). Selection of T3 The arresters of the last stage are installed as close as possible to the end device. Should a long cable be installed between the last stage and the appliance, voltage could have rise over a permissible level (e.g. due to induction) in the conductors. It is not allowed to install T3 closer than 5 m from T2 due to coordination maintenance. If the protected device is in the distance shorter than 10 m from the second stage, it is not necessary to install the third stage - the second stage will provide sufficient protection. The surge voltage arresters T3 must always be installed downstream of the surge voltage arrester T2. If the line continues farther, install another surge voltage arresters of stage 3 at least 10 m downstream of the previous T3.

Selection of the number of protection stages and types

Appliance sensitivity to overvoltage

INSTALLATION THREAT BIG

MEDIUM

- buildings with external lightning protection (lightning conductor), with grounded roof superstructure (aerial) etc. classed in lightning protection level LPL I or LPL II

- buildings with external lightning protection (lightning conductor), with grounded roof superstructure (aerial) etc. classed in lightning protection level LPL III or LPL IV or

- buildings without external lightning protection (lightning conductor), without grounded roof superstructure (aerial) etc. at the same time

LOW

- buildings with overhead cable lines

- buildings with underground cable lines

or - Individual housing units, if there is not possible to install common first protection stage T1 in HDS or HR - if there can be assumed such separation of lightning current into several branches that it will not exceed 12.5 kA(10/350 us) per one conductor

or - Individual housing units, if there is not possible to install common first protection stage T1 in house main switchboard (HDS) or main switchboard (HR)

Big - PC, TV, Hi-Fi system etc.

T1 (spark gap) + T2 (varistor) + T3 (varistor)

T1 (varistor) + T2 (varistor) + T3 (varistor)

T2 (varistor) + T3 (varistor)

Medium - washing machines, refrigerators etc.

T1 (spark gap) + T2 (varistor)

T1 (varistor) + T2 (varistor)

T2 (varistor)

Small - motors, fans etc.

T1 (spark gap) +T 2 (varistor)

T1 (varistor) + T2 (varistor)

T2 (varistor)

Selection of overvoltage protections T1 and T2 SUBDISTRIBUTION SWITCHBOARD

MAIN SWITCHBOARD SUBDISTRIBUTION SWITCHBOARD Installation Network - as close as possible to the inlet of power lead into the building Protection threat type Protection Recommended arrester type Recommended arrester type Low

TN-C TN-C-S TN-S, TT TN-C

Medium

TN-C-S TN-S, TT TN-C

Big

TN-C-S TN-S, TT TN-C

Industrial and special TN-C-S applications1) TN-S, TT 1) 2) 3)

D24

type T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 + T2 T1 T1 + T2 T1 T1 + T2 T1 T1 + T2 T1 T1 + T2 T1 T1 + T2 T1 T1+T2 T1 T1+T2 T1 T1+T2

first protection stage is not necessary first protection stage is not necessary first protection stage is not necessary SJB-25E-3-MZS 3 ks SVBC-12,5-1 SJB-25E-3-MZS 3 ks SVBC-12,5-1 SJB-25E-3N-MZS 3 ks SVBC-12,5-1 + 1 ks SVBC-50-N SJB-25E-3-MZS SJBC-25E-3-MZS SJB-25E-3-MZS SJBC-25E-3-MZS SJB-25E-3N-MZS SJBC-25E-3N-MZS 3 ks SJBplus-50-2,5 3 ks SJBplus-50-2,5 + 3 ks SVM-440-Z 3 ks SJBplus-50-2,5 3 ks SJBplus-50-2,5 + 3 ks SVM-440-Z 3 ks SJBplus-50-2,5 + 1 ks SJB-NPE-1,5 3 ks SJBplus-50-2,5 + 3 ks SVM-440-Z + SJB-NPE-1,5

type T2 T2 T2 T2 T2 T2 T2 T2 T2 T2 T2 T2 -

- as close as possible to the protected device

Protection Recommended arrester type type T3 SVD-253-1N-MZS / SVD-335-3N-MZS 3) T3 SVD-253-1N-MZS / SVD-335-3N-MZS 3) T3 SVD-253-1N-MZS / SVD-335-3N-MZS 3)

SVC-350-3-MZS / 3 ks SVC-275-1 SVC-350-3-MZS / 3 ks SVC-275-1 SVC-350-3N-MZS / 3 ks SVC-275-1 + 1 ks SVC-255-N-S SVC-350-3-MZS / 3 ks SVC-275-1 2) SVC-350-3N-MZS / 3 ks SVC-275-1 + 1 ks SVC-255-N-S

SVC-350-3N-MZS / 3 ks SVC-275-1 + 1 ks SVC-255-N-S 2) SVC-350-3-MZS / 3 ks SVC-275-1 2) SVC-350-3N-MZS / 3 ks SVC-275-1 + 1 ks SVC-255-N-S

3 ks SVM-440-Z + 1 ks SVM-NPE-Z 3 ks SVM-440-Z + 1 ks SVM-NPE-Z

SVD-253-1N-MZS / SVD-335-3N-MZS 3)

T3

SVD-253-1N-MZS / SVD-335-3N-MZS 3)

T3

SVD-253-1N-MZS / SVD-335-3N-MZS 3)

T3

SVD-253-1N-MZS / SVD-335-3N-MZS 3)

T3

SVD-253-1N-MZS / SVD-335-3N-MZS 3)

T3

SVD-253-1N-MZS / SVD-335-3N-MZS 3)

T3

SVD-253-1N-MZS / SVD-335-3N-MZS 3)

T3

SVD-253-1N-MZS / SVD-335-3N-MZS 3)

T3

SVD-253-1N-MZS / SVD-335-3N-MZS 3)

2)

SVC-350-3N-MZS / 3 ks SVC-275-1 + 1 ks SVC-255-N-S 2) 3 ks SVM-440-Z

T3 2)

Higher requirements for overvoltage protection parameters (Ifi > 25 kA, two-conductor lead etc.) SVC-350-... Can be used in immediate vicinity to SJB-25E-... When SVC-275-…is used, it is necessary to keep minimum mutual distance of lines 10 m. Type SVD-253-1N-MZS is intended for one-phase system, type SVD-335-3N-MZS for three-phase system.


Minia

Overvoltage protections

RECOMMENDATIONS FOR DESIGN, INSTALLATION AND MEASUREMENT OF OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTIONS INSTALLATION OF OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTIONS Lightning current arresters, i.e. the arresters type 1, are installed mainly on the interface of zones LPZ0 / LPZ1. The main switchboard is usually placed on this interface. The devices are installed on „U“ rail type TH 35 (DIN rail). Installation of the lightning current arresters in metering switchboard shall be approved by relevant power distribution companies. In not measured part, use the lightning current arresters SJBplus-... or SJB-25E-...

2. Installation of compact combined surge voltage arresters of type T1+T2

+ We recommend to install the compact combined arrester type 1 and 2 (SJBC = spark gap + varistor) in the main switchboard on„U“ rail type TH 35 in case it is possible to unite the boundaries of lightning protection levels LPZ0/LPZ1 and LPZ1/LPZ2. With its parameters and small dimensions, this combination is suitable for both industrial applications and applications in buildings, apartments etc.The advantage of combined arresters is that they provide complete solution for given system (etc. TN-C, TN-S) without the need of interconnecting busbars etc. -„one device = complete solution“. If it is not possible to unite the boundaries of lightning protection levels LPZ0/LPZ1 and LPZ1/LPZ2 (etc. in block of flats - in the unmeasured part there can not be installed varistor based overvoltage protection, then type SJB-25E-... has to be used on the boundary of LPZ0/LPZ1 and type SVC-...on the boundary of LPZ1/LPZ2 Combined arrester of lightning current type 1 and type 2 (SVBC – varistor) can be used in switchboards of individual

flats in cases when it is not possible to install common first protection stage (etc. block of flats, where there is not allowed to install in unmeasured part any type of overvoltage protection). Combined arrester of lightning current SVBC is thank to lightning current separation in several branches convenient protection for these applications. It is installed on „U“ rail type TH 35.

5. Installation of surge voltage arresters for photovoltaic systems Overvoltage protections SVF are installed on „U“ rail type TH 35 usually at the solar panel. At the length of the line between solar panels and inverter L>10 m we recommend to install the overvoltage protection also at the inverter on the L DC side. N PE

3. Installation of surge voltage arresters – T2 Surge voltage arresters T2 are installed mainly on boundaries of LPZ1 / LPZ2, that means in subsidiary switchboard behind the arresters of lightning current installed in the main switchboard. They are installed on „U“ rail type TH 35. It is necessary to ensure coordination of individual protection stages at installation. For more information see paragraph “Coordination of overvoltage protection“.

4. Installation of surge voltage arresters – T3

F

fig. 1. Continuous connection

Surge voltage arresters T2 are installed on „U“ rail of type TH 35. If the length of the line between T2 and T3<5 m, it is not necessary to use T3 – the parameters of coordination T2 and T3 would not be fulfilled. Protection is sufficiently provided by the surge voltage arrester T2. If the line continues farther, install another surge voltage arresters of stage 3 at least 10 m downstream of the previous T3. Surge voltage arresters of stage 3 can be connected to the line both lengthwise, see Fig. 1 and cross-wise see Fig. 2. Cross-connection to the line is advantageous in particular if the current flowing through the line is higher than the permitted rated load current IL of the surge voltage arrester T3.

L N PE

max. 0.5 m

1. Installation of lightning current arresters – T1

F

fig. 2. Transversal connection

PROTECTION OF OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTIONS 1. Protection of lightning current arresters – T1 Protection can be implemented in two ways: „ protection only by fuses F1 in the service box, if F1 correspond to the values stated in the table of technical parameters of given type. However, if in such wiring there are leakages and follow short-circuit currents, though the SJB arresters are able to quench the follow short-circuit currents, F1 may blow with subsequent interruption of power supply in the building. „ use of fuses F2 in addition to F1 if the latter are too big or if you do not want to interrupt the power supply. In such case selectivity must be ensured between F1 and F2 i.e. InF1 ≥ 1,6xInF2 . With this ratio of rated currents, F2 will cut out sooner than F1, and the power supply of the building will not

be interrupted. However, the values InF2 may be low, and F2 will blow more frequently. For this reason it is recommended to equip the fuse F2 with a signalling device.

2. Protection of surge voltage arresters – T2 The previous paragraph applies also to the protection of surge voltage arresters, however in Wiring diagram examples these fuses are designated F3.

i.e. the arrester SJB-NPE-1.5 and the module between N and PE for the other versions are not protected separately. Because their protection is already provided by fuses F1, F2 or F3, see the wiring diagram examples.

5.Protection of arresters for photovoltaic systems It is not needed to protect the arrester for photovoltaic systems in any special way. However, in case of two varistors design and one spark gap the limit of maximum short-circuit current has to be considered.

3. Protection of surge voltage arresters – T3 Surge voltage arresters SVD shall be protected by circuit breakers or fuses gG max. 25 A.

4. Protection of arresters for connection„3+1“ Arresters for connection between N and PE conductors,

COORDINATION OF OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTION The correct function of multiple stage protection is conditioned by correct coordination of individual stages. At first the most sensitive stage of protection reacts. Before it gets overloaded the superior stage has to react. It is valid in case of T1 and T2 that if their mutual distance is bigger than 10 m (the length of conductors), the coordination is guaranteed by the physical features of the lines. It means that we can use any combination of first and second protection stage (once we follow other installation instructions).

In case we need to install T2 closer to T1, it is necessary to use combination of overvoltage protection designed for this purpose: T1 SJBplus-50-2,5 SJB-25E-..

<5m SVM-440-.. SVC-350-..

T2 5 ÷ 10 SVC-350-.. SVC-350-..

T2

T3

> 10 arbitrary arbitrary

It is necessary to observe the minimal distance 5 m for the coordination between the second end the third stages of the protection.

>5m

D25


Minia

Overvoltage protections

RECOMMENDATIONS FOR DESIGN, INSTALLATION AND MEASUREMENT OF OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTIONS Low installation threat a) Family houses without lightning conductor and exposed conductive parts „Conducted by underground cable line. „Where there is no threat of direct lightning stroke to the nearby building with lightning conductor which is galvanically connected to the protected building. b)

Individual housing units

„ It is possible to install common first protection stage T1 in the main switchboard in the block of flats.

STANDARD SOLUTION

ECONOMICAL SOLUTION G1L-50-16-L (39789) 3 pcs SVC-275-1 (38842)

SVC-350-3-MZ (38365)

SCV -275

SC V- 275

SCV -275

TN-C F1 L1 L2 L3 PEN

F2 if F1>125 A L1 L2 L3 PEN

F2 if F1>125 A L1 L2 L3 PEN

F1 L1 L2 L3 PEN

G1L-50-16-L (39789)

SVC-350-3-MZ (38365)

3 pcs SVC-275-1 (38842) SCV -275

TN-C-S F1 L1 L2 L3 PEN

F2 if F1>125 A L1 L2 L3 N PE

SCV -275

SCV -275

F2 if F1>125 A L1 L2 L3 N PE

F1 L1 L2 L3 PEN

G1L-65-16-L (39790) 3 pcs SVC-275-1 (38842) 1 pc SVC-255-N-S (38844)

SVC-350-3N-MZ (38367)

TN-S, TT

D26

F1 L1 L2 L3 N PE

F2 if F1>125 A L1 L2 L3 N PE

F1 L1 L2 L3 N PE

SCV -275

SCV -275

SCV -275

SC V- 255

F2 if F1>125 A L1 L2 L3 N PE


Minia

Overvoltage protections

RECOMMENDATIONS FOR DESIGN, INSTALLATION AND MEASUREMENT OF OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTIONS Medium installation threat a) Family houses „Where there is a threat of direct lightning stroke to the protected building or to the nearby building with lightning conductor which is galvanically connected to the protected building - level of protection against lightning LPL III or LPL IV. „With overhead cable line. b) Individual housing units „In the block of flats where it is not possible to install common first protection stage T1 in the main switchboard and where

due to lightning current separation in several branches its level does not exceed 12.5 kA (10/350 μs).

STANDARD SOLUTION

SOLUTION FOR NECESSARY SEPARATION OF T1 AND T2

G1L-50-16-L (39789) SJB-25E-3-MZS (38357)

3 pcs SVBC-12,5-1 (39027)

TN-C

SVBC-12,5

SVBC-12,5

SVC-350-3-MZ (38365)

SVBC-12, 5

F2 if F1 > 160 A L1 L2 L3 PEN

F1 L1 L2 L3 PEN

F1

F2 if F1 > 315 A

L1 L2 L3 PEN

F3 if F1 > 125 A L1 L2 L3 PE N

L ... arbitrary

G1L-50-16-L (39789) SJB-25E-3-MZS (38357)

3 pcs SVBC-12,5-1 (39027) SVBC-12,5

SVBC-12,5

SVBC-12,5

TN-C-S F2 if F1 > 160 A L1 L2 L3 N PE

F1 L1 L2 L3 PEN

TN-S, TT

F1 L1 L2 L3 N PE

F1

F2 if F1 > 315 A

L1 L2 L3 PEN

F3 if F1 > 125 A L1 L2 L3 N PE

L ... arbitrary

G1L-65-16-L (39790)

SJB-25-3N-MSZ

SJB-25-3N-MSZ

3 pcs SVBC-12,5-1 (39027) + 1 pc SVBC-50-N (39004)

SVC-350-3N-MZ (38367)

SJB-25E-3N-MZS (38358) SVBC-12, 5

SVBC-12,5

SVBC-12, 5

SVC-350-3N-MZ (38367)

SVBC-50

F2 if F1 > 160 A L1 L2 L3 N PE

F1

F2 if F1 > 315 A

L1 L2 L3 N PE

F3 if F1 > 125 A L1 L2 L3 N PE

L ... arbitrary

D27


Minia

Overvoltage protections

RECOMMENDATIONS FOR DESIGN, INSTALLATION AND MEASUREMENT OF OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTIONS Big installation threat a) Family houses with lightning conductor or exposed conductive parts „Independent on connection type. „Where there is a threat of direct lightning stroke to the protected building or to the nearby building with lightning conductor which is galvanically connected to the protected building - level of protection against lightning LPL I or LPL II. b) Individual housing units „In the block of flats where it is not possible to install common first

protection stage T1 in the main switchboard and where the lightning current can exceed 12.5 kA (10/350 μs).

STANDARD SOLUTION

SOLUTION FOR NECESSARY SEPARATION OF T1 AND T2

SJB-25E-3-MZS (38357)

SJBC-25E-3-MZS (38361)

SVC-350-3-MZ (38365)

TN-C F1 L1 L2 L3 PEN

F1

F2 if F1 > 315 A L1 L2 L3 PEN

F2 if F1 > 315 A

L1 L2 L3 PEN

L ... arbitrary

SJB-25E-3-MZS (38357)

SJBC-25E-3-MZS (38361)

F3 if F1 > 125 A L1 L2 L3 PE N

SVC-350-3N-MZ (38367)

TN-C-S F1 L1 L2 L3 PEN

F2 if F1 > 315 A L1 L2 L3 N PE

F1

F2 if F1 > 315 A

L1 L2 L3 PEN

F3 if F1 > 125 A L1 L2 L3 N PE

L ... arbitrary

SJB-25-3N-MSZ SJB-25-3N-MSZ

SJBC-25E-3N-MZS (38362)

TN-S, TT

F1 L1 L2 L3 N PE

D28

SJB-25E-3N-MZS (38358)

F2 if F1 > 315 A L1 L2 L3 N PE

F1

SVC-350-3N-MZ (38367)

F2 if F1 > 315 A

L1 L2 L3 N PE L ... arbitrary

F3 if F1 > 125 A L1 L2 L3 N PE


Minia

Overvoltage protections

RECOMMENDATIONS FOR DESIGN, INSTALLATION AND MEASUREMENT OF OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTIONS Industrial and special applications a) Industrial applications, where higher requirements for overvoltage protections have to be met, e.g. due to high shortcircuit current Â&#x201E;The separation of lightning current is the same as in case of big installation threat. T1 +T2

b) Buildings with two-conductor lead fulfil the parameters of group big installation threat

T1 +T2

STANDARD SOLUTION

3 pcs SJBplus-50-2,5 (39227) +

TN-C

F1

3 pcs SJBplus-50-2,5 (39227) + 3 pcs SVM-440-Z (34720) + 1 pc SJB-NPE-1,5 (34716) L1 L2 L3 N PE

TN-C

G1L-1000-16-L (39788)

G1L-1000-16-L (39788)

3 pcs SJBplus-50-2,5 (39227)

3 pcsSVM-440-Z (34720)

G1L-50-16-L (39789)

3 pcs SVM-440-Z (34720)

L1 L2 L3 PEN

TN-S

SOLUTION FOR NECESSARY SEPARATION OF T1 AND T2

F1

F2 if F1 > 125 A

L1 L2 L3 PEN

L1 L2 L3 PEN

F1

F3 if F1 > 125 A L1 L2 L3 PEN

G1L-1000-16-L (39788)

G1L-1000-16-L (39788) 3 pcs SJBplus-50-2,5 (39227) + 1 pc SJB-NPE-1,5 (34716) F2 if F1 > 125 A

F2 if F1 > 500 A

L1 L2 L3 N PE

SJBplus-50-2,5 (39227) +

L1 L2 L3 N PE

F1

3 pcs SVM-440-Z (34720) + 3 pcs SVM-NPE-Z (34723) F2 if F1 > 500 A

SJBplus-50-2,5 (39227)

G1L-65-16-L (39790)

F3 if F1 > 125 A L1 L2 L3 N PE

SVM-440-Z (34720)

SVM-440-Z (34720)

L1 PEN

F1

F2 if F1 > 125 A

L1 PEN

L1 PEN

F1

F2 if F1 > 500 A

F3 if F1 > 125 A L1 PEN

D29


Minia

Overvoltage protections

RECOMMENDATIONS FOR DESIGN, INSTALLATION AND MEASUREMENT OF OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTIONS Photovoltaic systems Photovoltaic array AC Switch Measuring -disconnector

Converter

DC Switch-disconnector

Main switch Measuring Main -disconnector protection

Switchboard

Wh

Wh

L1

DC

Protection against overvoltage

AC

Protection against overvoltage

Protection against overvoltage

a) Photovoltaic sources up to 1000 V d.c. „Where there is no threat of direct stroke to the solar panel or lines. „Dependent on the length of line between the panels and the inverter one or two devices are used. In general, at the length of line L1 > 10 m we use the overvoltage protection at both the solar panel and the inverter, at the length of the line L ≤ 10 m we use the overvoltage protection either at the solar panel or at the inverter. „Versions for 1000 V d.c. and 600 V d.c.

Max. operating voltage Uc = 1000 V L1 ≤ 10m

L1 > 10 m

SVF-1000-2VB-MZ

S VF-1000-2VB-MZ (3 9165 )

Up ื 2,5kV In 15kA

SVF-1000-2VB-MZ

Up ื 3kV In 15kA

SVF-1000-V

SVF-1000-B

S VF-1000-2VB-MZ (3 9165 )

Up ื 2,5kV In 15kA

Up ื 2,5kV In 15kA

SVF-1000- V

L+

SVF-1000-2VB-MZ

Up ื 3kV In 15kA

SVF-1000-V

SVF-1000-B

L+

L-

L+ L-

L+ L-

Up ื 2,5kV In 15kA

S VF-1000-2VB-MZ (3 9165 )

Up ื 2,5kV In 15kA

SVF-1000- V

Up ื 3kV In 15kA

SVF-1000-V

Up ื 2,5kV In 15kA

SVF-1000- B S VF-1000- V

L+

L-

L-

L+ L-

L+ L-

PE

PE

PE

Max. operating voltage Uc = 600 V L1 ≤ 10m

L1> 10m

SVF-1000-2VB-MZ

S VF-600-3V-MZ (3 9528 )

Up ื 3kV In 15kA

SVF-600- V

SVF-1000-2VB-MZ

Up ื 3kV In 15kA

SVF-600-B

L+

L+ L-

Up ื 3kV In 15kA

SVF-600- V

SVF-600- V

L-

L+

L+ L-

PE

D30

S VF-600-3V-MZ (3 9528 )

Up ื 3kV In 15kA

SVF-1000-2VB-MZ

Up ื 3kV In 15kA

SVF-600-B

Up ื 3kV In 15kA

S VF-600-3V-MZ (3 9528 )

Up ื 3kV In 15kA

SVF-600- V

SVF-600- V

L-

L+

Up ื 3kV In 15kA

SVF-600-B

Up ื 3kV In 15kA

SVF-600- V L-

L+ L-

L+ L-

PE

PE

Transformer


Minia

‰Installation relays......................................................................................................................E2 ‰Installation contactors............................................................................................................E4 ‰Priority current relays............................................................................................................. E11 ‰Multiple-function time relays.............................................................................................E13 ‰Time relays..................................................................................................................................... E17 ‰Impulse memory relay.............................................................................................................E20 ‰Stair switches................................................................................................................................ E24 ‰Timers............................................................................................................................................... E27 ‰Tumbler power switches........................................................................................................ E29 ‰Tumbler switches........................................................................................................................ E35 ‰Rocker-type switches and change-over switches.................................................... E38 ‰Push-button switches.............................................................................................................. E40 ‰Control push-buttons................................................................................................................ E42 ‰Signal lights................................................................................................................................... E45 ‰Electric bells and buzzers.......................................................................................................E47 ‰Power supplies.............................................................................................................................E48 ‰Socket outlets.............................................................................................................................. E51 ‰Interconnecting busbars........................................................................................................E52 ‰Terminal extensions................................................................................................................. E57 ‰Terminal board............................................................................................................................ E59

OTHER DEVICES

E


Minia

Other devices

INSTALLATION RELAYS Installation relays RPR-16-.. „For switching of electric appliances up to 16 A – electric boilers, direct heating convectors, accumulator stoves, lighting etc. „For automation purposes in connection with a multiple-function time relay MCR, impulse relay MIR, priority relay RLP, signal light MKA, program timer MAP, MAR, tumbler switches MSP, control push-buttons MTX etc.

Rated voltage Uc 24 V a.c. / d.c., 230 V a.c.

Colour of indication red green

Type RPR-16-001-X230-SC RPR-16-001-X230-SE

Installation relays RPR-08-... „For switching of electric appliances up to 8 A – electric boilers, direct heating convectors, accumulator stoves, lighting etc. „For automation purposes in connection with a multiple-function time relay MCR, impulse relay MIR, priority relay RLP, signal light MKA, program timer MAP, MAR, tumbler switches MSP, control push-buttons MTX etc.

Rated voltage Uc 24 V a.c. / d.c., 230 V a.c.

E2

Colour of indication red green

Type RPR-08-002-X230-SC RPR-08-002-X230-SE

„Light indication at power up. „Noiseless switching. „Contacts: 1 make-and-break. „Control voltage: 24 V a.c./d.c.; 230 V a.c. „There is ensured such electrical isolation between the

control circuit (coil) and main circuit (contact) as it is between inlet and outlet lead of the safety transformer. Product code 35668 35669

Number of modules 1 1

Weight [kg] 0.07 0.07

Package [pcs] 1 1

„Light indication at power up. „Noiseless switching. „Contacts: 2 make-and-break. „Control voltage: 24 V a.c./d.c.; 230 V a.c. „There is ensured such electrical isolation between the

control circuit (coil) and main circuit (contact) as it is between inlet and outlet lead of the safety transformer. Product code 35670 35671

Number of modules 1 1

Weight [kg] 0.07 0.07

Package [pcs] 1 1


Other devices

Minia

INSTALLATION RELAYS Specifications Type

RPR-16-...

RPR-08-...

Standards Approval marks

EN 60669-2-2

EN 60669-2-2

001 250 V a.c. / 16 A 24 V d.c. / 16 A 4000 VA 384 W 5 V d.c. / 100 mA red / green LED 20 000 000 operating cycles 50 000 operating cycles (AC), 30 000 (DC) 0.2 ÷ 2.5 mm2 0.5 Nm

002 250 V a.c. / 8 A 30 V d.c. / 8 A 2000 VA 240 W red / green LED 5 000 000 operating cycles 100 000 operating cycles 0.2 ÷ 2.5 mm2 0.5 Nm

24 V a.c./d.c. 230 V a.c. 0.42 VA 0.43 W 5.5 VA 50 Hz 0.2 ÷ 2.5 mm2 0.5 Nm

24 V a.c./d.c. 230 V a.c. 0.32 VA 0.35 W 5.5 VA 50 Hz 0.2 ÷ 2.5 mm2 0.5 Nm

TH 35 IP20 -20 ÷ + 55 °C arbitrary

TH 35 IP20 -20 ÷ + 55 °C arbitrary

Main circuit (contact) Arrangement of contacts 1) Rated operating voltage / current

Ue / Ie

AC-1 DC-1 AC DC

Uc

terminals A1, A2 terminals A2, A3 Uc 24 V a.c. Uc 24 V d.c. Uc 230 V a.c.

Max. switched power Min. voltage / current Signalling at power up Mechanical endurance Electrical endurance Connection Torque Control circuit (coil) Rated voltage Input power at

Rated frequency fn Connection Torque Other data Mounting on “U” rail according to EN 60715 - type Degree of protection Ambient temperature Working position 1) Each digit indicates successively the number of make, break and break-make contacts

Dimensions

17.5

17.5

~4.5

86

14 12 11

21 22 24 14 12 11

45

A1 A2 A3

~88

A1 A2 A3

65.5

RPR-08-..

35

RPR-16-..

24 44 62

2

Diagram RPR-08...

RPR-16... A3

A1

A2

12

14

11

A3

A1

A2

22

24

21

12

14

11

E3


Minia

Other devices

INSTALLATION CONTACTORS Installation contactors „For switching of appliances up to 63 A – electric boilers, direct heating convectors, accumulator stoves, lighting etc.

„Control voltage: 24 V a.c., 230 V a.c. „Visual light indication at power up. „Decreased switching noise and vibration.

Installation contactors 20 A Arrangement of contacts 1) 10

Rated voltage Type Product Uc code 230 V a.c. RSI-20-10-A230 36609 230 V a.c. RSI-20-20-A230 36610 20 24 V a.c. RSI-20-20-A024 36614 230 V a.c. RSI-20-11-A230 36611 11 24 V a.c. RSI-20-11-A024 36615 230 V a.c. RSI-20-02-A230 36612 02 24 V a.c. RSI-20-02-A024 36616 1) Each digit indicates successively the number of make and break contacts

Number of modules 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Weight [kg] 0.13 0.13 0.13 0.13 0.13 0.13 0.13

Package [pcs] 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Number of modules 2 2 2 2 2

Weight [kg] 0.23 0.23 0.23 0.23 0.23

Package [pcs] 1 1 1 1 1

Number of modules 3 3 3 3 3

Weight [kg] 0.38 0.38 0.38 0.38 0.38

Package [pcs] 1 1 1 1 1

Number of modules 3 3 3 3 3

Weight [kg] 0.38 0.38 0.38 0.38 0.38

Package [pcs] 1 1 1 1 1

Installation contactors 25 A Arrangement of contacts 1)

Rated voltage Type Product Uc code 230 V a.c. RSI-25-40-A230 36617 40 24 V a.c. RSI-25-40-A024 36621 230 V a.c. RSI-25-31-A230 36618 31 24 V a.c. RSI-25-31-A024 36622 04 230 V a.c. RSI-25-04-A230 36620 1) Each digit indicates successively the number of make and break contacts

Installation contactors 40 A Arrangement of contacts 1)

Rated voltage Type Product Uc code 230 V a.c. RSI-40-40-A230 36625 40 24 V a.c. RSI-40-40-A024 36629 230 V a.c. RSI-40-31-A230 36626 31 24 V a.c. RSI-40-31-A024 36630 04 230 V a.c. RSI-40-04-A230 36628 1) Each digit indicates successively the number of make and break contacts

Installation contactors 63 A Arrangement of contacts 1)

Rated voltage Type Product Uc code 230 V a.c. RSI-63-40-A230 36633 40 24 V a.c. RSI-63-40-A024 36637 230 V a.c. RSI-63-31-A230 36634 31 24 V a.c. RSI-63-31-A024 36638 04 230 V a.c. RSI-63-04-A230 36636 1) Each digit indicates successively the number of make and break contacts

E4


Minia

Other devices

INSTALLATION CONTACTORS Installation contactors with manual control „For switching of electric appliances up to 63 A – electric boilers, direct heating convectors, accumulator stoves, lighting etc. „Control voltage: 24, 230 V a.c. „Visual light indication at power up. „Decreased switching noise and vibration.

„They are equipped with change-over switch with three positions:

- position „AUTO“ – common function of the contactor - position „I“ – make contacts close and break contacts open. If rated voltage Uc is applied on the contactor coil, the switch will go to position „AUTO“ - position „O“ – contactor coil circuit is interrupted

Installation contactors 20 A Arrangement of contacts 1)

Rated voltage Type Product Uc code 230 V a.c. RSI-20-20-A230-M 36641 20 24 V a.c. RSI-20-20-A024-M 36643 230 V a.c. RSI-20-11-A230-M 36642 11 24 V a.c. RSI-20-11-A024-M 36644 1) Each digit indicates successively the number of make and break contacts

Number of modules 1 1 1 1

Weight [kg] 0.135 0.135 0.135 0.135

Package [pcs] 1 1 1 1

Number of modules 2 2 2 2

Weight [kg] 0.235 0.235 0.235 0.235

Package [pcs] 1 1 1 1

Number of modules 3 3 3 3

Weight [kg] 0.39 0.39 0.39 0.39

Package [pcs] 1 1 1 1

Number of modules 3

Weight [kg] 0.39

Package [pcs] 1

Installation contactors 25 A Arrangement of contacts 1)

Rated voltage Type Product Uc code 230 V a.c. RSI-25-40-A230-M 36645 40 24 V a.c. RSI-25-40-A024-M 36647 230 V a.c. RSI-25-31-A230-M 36646 31 24 V a.c. RSI-25-31-A024-M 36648 1) Each digit indicates successively the number of make and break contacts

Installation contactors 40 A Arrangement of contacts 1)

Rated voltage Type Product Uc code 230 V a.c. RSI-40-40-A230-M 36649 40 24 V a.c. RSI-40-40-A024-M 36651 230 V a.c. RSI-40-31-A230-M 36650 31 24 V a.c. RSI-40-31-A024-M 36652 1) Each digit indicates successively the number of make and break contacts

Installation contactors 63 A Arrangement Rated voltage Type Product of contacts 1) Uc code 40 230 V a.c. RSI-63-40-A230-M 36653 1) Each digit indicates successively the number of make and break contacts

E5


Minia

Other devices

INSTALLATION CONTACTORS Accessories Auxiliary switch „For signalling the main contact position of installation contactors. „Installation: by means of plastic latches on the right side of the installation contactor.

„It is possible to mount one auxiliary switch on one

installation contactor. „Width: 9 mm.

Arrangement Type Product code of contacts 1) 11 PS-RSI-1100 36657 1) Each digit indicates successively the number of make and break contacts

E6

Number of modules 0.5

Weight [kg] 0.03

Package [pcs] 1


Minia

Other devices

INSTALLATION CONTACTORS Specifications Type

RSI-20-...

RSI-25-...

RSI-40-...

RSI-63-...

PS-RSI-1100

Standards

EN 60947-4-1 EN 61095

EN 60947-4-1 EN 61095

EN 60947-4-1 EN 61095

EN 60947-4-1 EN 61095

EN 60947-5-1

10, 20, 11, 02 20 A 230 V a.c. 20 A 20 A 1A 0,5 A 6A 4A 4 kW 1.3 kW 2) 17 V / 50 mA 600 operating cycles/h 200 000 operating cycles 300 000 operating cycles 3 000 000 operating cycles 1,7 VA 20 A 1 3.6 mm 15 ÷ 25 ms (10 ms) 20 ms (20 ÷ 25 ms) 1 ÷ 10 mm2 1 ÷ 6 mm2 1.2 Nm

40, 31, 04 25 A 440 V a.c. 25 A 25 A 2A 0,5 A 6A 4A 9 kW 16 kW 2.2 kW 4 kW 17 V / 50 mA 600 operating cycles/h 200 000 operating cycles 500 000 operating cycles 3 000 000 operating cycles 2,2 VA 35 A 1 3.6 mm 10 ÷ 20 ms (10 ms) 20 ms (25 ÷ 30 ms) 1 ÷ 10 mm2 1 ÷ 6 mm2 1.2 Nm

40, 31, 04 40 A 440 V a.c. 40 A 40 A 4A 0,8 A 6A 4A 16 kW 26 kW 5.5 kW 11 kW 17 V / 50 mA 600 operating cycles/h 100 000 operating cycles 150 000 operating cycles 3 000 000 operating cycles 4 VA 63 A 1 3.4 mm 15 ÷ 20 ms (5 ÷ 10 ms) 10 ms (10 ÷ 15 ms) 1 ÷ 25 mm2 1 ÷ 16 mm2 2 Nm

40, 31, 04 63 A 440 V a.c. 63 A 63 A 4A 0,8 A 6A 4A 24 kW 40 kW 8.5 kW 15 kW 17 V / 50 mA 600 operating cycles/h 100 000 operating cycles 150 000 operating cycles 3 000 000 operating cycles 8 VA 80 A 1 3.4 mm 15 ÷ 20 ms (5 ÷ 10 ms) 10 ms (10 ÷ 15 ms) 1 ÷ 25 mm2 1 ÷ 16 mm2 2 Nm

11 6A 230 V a.c. 6A 4A 12 V / 10 mA 600 operating cycles/h 3 000 000 operating cycles 6A 1 4 mm 1 ÷ 2.5 mm2 1 ÷ 2.5 mm2 0.6 Nm

24, 230 V a.c. 85 ÷ 110 % 50 / 60 Hz 15 VA / 13 W (6 VA / 3.8 W) 3 VA / 1.9 W 1 ÷ 2.5 mm2 1 ÷ 2.5 mm2 0.6 Nm

24, 230 V a.c. 85 ÷ 110 % 50 / 60 Hz 27 VA / 17 W (5.2 VA / 2 W) 2.6 VA / 1 W 1 ÷ 2.5 mm2 1 ÷ 2.5 mm2 0.6 Nm

24, 230 V a.c. 85 ÷ 110 % 50 / 60 Hz 62 VA / 50 W (15.4 VA / 6 W) 7.7 VA / 3W 1 ÷ 2.5 mm2 1 ÷ 2.5 mm2 0.6 Nm

24, 230 V a.c. 85 ÷ 110 % 50 / 60 Hz 62 VA / 50 W (15.4 VA / 6 W) 7.7 VA / 3W 1 ÷ 2.5 mm2 1 ÷ 2.5 mm2 0.6 Nm

-

440 V a.c. 4 kV TH 35 IP20 -5 ÷ + 55 °C IEC 980:1993

440 V a.c. 4 kV TH 35 IP20 -5 ÷ + 55 °C IEC 980:1993

500 V a.c. 4 kV IP20 -5 ÷ + 55 °C IEC 980:1993

Approval marks Contacts Arrangement of contacts 1) Rated thermal current Rated operating voltage Rated operating current

Ith Ue Ie

Switched power

Min. switched power Switching frequency max. Electrical endurance at Ie Mechanical endurance Power loss at Ie per pole Short-circuit protection - fuse gG Coordination type Min. distance between open contacts Make time 3) Break time 3) Connection – conductor rigid Connection – conductor rigid with a sleeve Torque Control circuit (coil) Rated voltage Uc Operating range Rated frequency Power loss - at operation 4)

AC-1

230 V a.c. 24 V d.c. DC-1 110 V d.c. 220 V d.c. 230 V a.c. AC-15 400 V a.c. 230 V a.c. AC-1 / AC –7a 400 V a.c. 230 V a.c. AC-3 / AC –7b 400 V a.c.

AC-1 / AC-7a AC-3 / AC-7b

Power loss – holding Connection – conductor rigid Connection – conductor rigid with a sleeve Torque Other data Rated insulation voltage Ui 440 V a.c. 440 V a.c. Rated impulse voltage Uimp 4 kV 4 kV Mounting on “U” rail according to EN 60715 - type TH 35 TH 35 Degree of protection IP20 IP20 Ambient temperature -5 ÷ + 55 °C -5 ÷ + 55 °C Seismic resistance IEC 980:1993 5) IEC 980:1993 1) Each digit indicates successively the number of make and break contacts 2) Only for making contact 3) Values in parentheses are valid for break-type contact 4) Values in parentheses are valid for installation contactors with manual control with switch in position „I“ 5) It passed the seismic tests for NPP Dukovany and Temelín

Working position

180°

5)

5)

5)

-

5)

Dependency on ambient temperature „If several contactors are installed in parallel in a switchboard, the following rules shall apply: - installation contactors RSI-25-.., RSI-40-.. RSI-63-.. can be installed in parallel without limitation up to ambient temperature of 55°C - for installation contactor RSI-20-.. at ambient temperature up to 40 °C, a 0.5 gap must be left after every third contactor. At ambient temperature between 40 °C and 55 °C a gap of 0.5 module must be left after every second contactor

E7


Minia

Other devices

INSTALLATION CONTACTORS Switching of resistance or slightly inductive load in DC circuits (utilization category DC-1) Installation contactor Type RSI-20-... RSI-25-... RSI-40-... RSI-63-...

Contact load Operating voltage Ue 24 V d.c. 110 V d.c. 220 V d.c. 24 V d.c. 110 V d.c. 220 V d.c. 24 V d.c. 110 V d.c. 220 V d.c. 24 V d.c. 110 V d.c. 220 V d.c.

1 contact 20 A 1A 0.5 A 25 A 2A 0.5 A 40 A 4A 0.8 A 63 A 4A 0.8 A

2 contacts in series 20 A 3A 1.5 A 25 A 4A 1.5 A 40 A 10 A 6A 63 A 10 A 6A

3 contacts in series 25 A 6A 2.5 A 40 A 30 A 20 A 63 A 35 A 30 A

4 contacts in series 25 A 8A 3.5 A 40 A 40 A 40 A 63 A 63 A 63 A

Switching of lights - maximum number of light fittings per one contact at 230 V a.c., 50 Hz (utilization category AC-5a, AC-5b) Light bulbs Installation contactor Type RSI-20-... RSI-25-... RSI-40-... RSI-63-...

Fluorescent tubes Installation contactor Type RSI-20-... RSI-25-... RSI-40-... RSI-63-...

60 W 23 29 65 85

Fluorescent tubes with electronic ballast (ECG) Installation contactor Type RSI-20-... RSI-25-... RSI-40-... RSI-63-...

High-pressure mercury discharge lamps (HQL) Installation contactor Type 50 W 80 W RSI-20-... 14 10 RSI-25-... 18 13 RSI-40-... 38 29 RSI-63-... 55 42

Metal halide discharge lamps (HQI) Installation contactor Type 70 W RSI-20-... 10 RSI-25-... 12 RSI-40-... 23 RSI-63-... 32

E8

Uncompensated 36 W 17 20 65 95

18 W 22 24 90 140

150 W 5 7 12 18

Lighting fitting 200 W 7 8 20 25

100 W 14 16 40 50

500 W 3 3 8 10

Compensated in parallel 18 W / 4,5 μF 36 W / 4,5 μF 58 W / 7 μF 7 7 4 8 8 5 48 48 31 73 73 47

58 W 14 17 45 70

1000 W 1 1 4 5

2x 18 W 30 40 100 150

Duo connection 2x 36 W 17 24 65 95

2x 58 W 10 14 40 60

Lighting fitting 18 W 25 35 100 140

36 W 15 20 52 75

Uncompensated 125 W 250 W 400 W 7 4 2 9 5 3 20 10 7 29 15 10

Uncompensated 250 W 400 W 3 3 4 3 7 6 10 9

700 W 1 2 4 6

1000 W 1 1 2 3

58 W 14 19 50 72

1000 W 1 1 3 4

2000 W 0 0 1 1

50 W/7 μF 4 5 31 47

70 W/12 μF 2 3 18 25

2x 18 W 12 17 50 70

80 W/8 μF 4 5 27 41

2x 36 W 7 10 26 38

2x 58 W 7 9 25 36

Compensated in parallel 125 W/10 μF 250 W/18 μF 400 W/25 μF 700 W/45 μF 1000 W/60 μF 3 1 1 0 0 4 2 1 0 0 22 12 9 5 4 33 18 13 7 5

150 W/20 μF 1 1 11 15

Compensated in parallel 250 W/33 μF 400 W/35 μF 0 0 1 0 6 6 9 8

1000 W/95 μF 0 0 2 3

2000 W/148 μF 0 0 1 2


Minia

Other devices

INSTALLATION CONTACTORS High-pressure sodium discharge lamps (NAV) Installation contactor Type 150 W RSI-20-... 5 RSI-25-... 6 RSI-40-... 17 RSI-63-... 22

Low-pressure sodium discharge lamps Installation contactor Type 18 W RSI-20-... 22 RSI-25-... 27 RSI-40-... 71 RSI-63-... 90

Uncompensated 250 W 400 W 3 2 4 2 10 6 13 8

Uncompensated 55 W 90 W 7 7 9 5 23 14 30 19

35 W 7 9 23 30

1000 W 0 1 3 3

135 W 3 4 10 13

Compensated in parallel 250 W / 33 μF 400 W / 48 μF 0 0 1 0 6 4 10 6

150 W / 20 μF 1 1 11 16

180 W 3 4 10 13

18 W / 5 μF 6 7 44 66

1000 W / 106 μF 0 0 2 3

Compensated in parallel 35 W / 20 μF 55 W / 20 μF 90 W / 26 μF 135 W / 45 μF 180 W / 40 μF 1 1 1 1 1 1 11 11 8 4 5 16 16 12 7 8

Dimensions

45

44

35

44 64

4.5

45

PS-RSI-1100

7

90

RSI-40-... RSI-63-..

54

7

4.5

64

45

7

9

44 64

4.5

90

17.5

90

45

RSI-25-..

90

RSI-20-..

44 64

E9


Minia

Other devices

INSTALLATION CONTACTORS Diagram RSI-20-10-..

RSI-20-20-. .

RSI-20-11-..

RSI-20-02-..

A1

1

A1

1

3

A1

1

R3

A1

R1

R3

A2

2

A2

2

4

A2

2

R4

A2

R2

R4

RSI-25-40-.., RSI-40-40-.., RSI-63-40-..

RSI-25-31-.., RSI-40-31-.., RSI-63-31-..

RSI-25-04-.., RSI-40-04-.., RSI-63-04-..

A1

1

3

5

7

A1

1

3

5

R7

A1

R1

R3

R5

R7

A2

2

4

6

8

A2

2

4

6

R8

A2

R2

R4

R6

R8

PS-RSI-1100 31

43

32

44

E10


Minia

Other devices

PRIORITY CURRENT RELAYS „They monitor the strength of current in the circuit and

close/open the contact (terminals 1, 2) at a jump exceeding of a guaranteed switched current. „They make it possible to interrupt the power supply of one (non-priority) circuit, if the current of the other (priority) circuit jumps to a set value. „They are most frequently installed in distribution systems where concurrent operation of more appliances is not possible because of risk of exceeding a permitted power input. „For example, the relays can disconnect electric heating, a storage block heater from the network if an

instantaneous water heater is switched – therefore it is possible to select a main circuit breaker and conductors for a lower power input. „They make it possible to increase the number of appliances for existing installations. „In the circuits with electronic (e.g. thyristor) control, they cannot be used directly, but with a time-delay relay – see connection examples. „Maximum current through the current coil: depending on design (15 A, 28 A, 63 A). „Maximum current through the contact: 16 A.

Operating current range In

Arrangement Type Product of contacts 1) code 01 RLP-15-01 35548 5 ÷ 15 A 10 RLP-15-10 35549 01 RLP-28-01 35550 10 ÷ 28 A 10 RLP-28-10 35551 01 RLP-63-01 35552 26 ÷ 63 A 10 RLP-63-10 35553 1) Each digit indicates successively the number of make and break contacts

Number of modules 1 1 1 1 1 1

Weight [kg] 0.115 0.115 0.115 0.115 0.115 0.115

Package [pcs] 1 1 1 1 1 1

Specifications RLP-..

Type Approval marks Contact (terminals 1,2) Arrangement of contacts 1) Rated voltage/current Electrical endurance Switching frequency Connection Torque Current coil (terminals A1, A2) Operating current range Guaranteed switched current for In 2)

Guaranteed unswitched current for In 2)

AC-1

Ue/In

In

5 ÷ 15 A, 10 ÷ 28 A, 26 ÷ 63 A ≥5A ≥ 10 A ≥ 26 A ≤2A ≤6A ≤ 16 A 0.75 ÷ 16 mm2 2 Nm 3W

Ui

400 V a.c. TH 35 IP20 -20 ÷ 50 °C arbitrary

range 5 ÷ 15 range 10 ÷ 28 range 26 ÷ 63 range 5 ÷ 15 range 10 ÷ 28 range 26 ÷ 63

Connection - terminals A1, A2 Torque Power loss Other data Isolation voltage Mounting on “U” rail according to EN 60715 - type Degree of protection Ambient temperature Working position 1) Each digit indicates successively the number of make and break contacts 2) Only for jump increase in current

RLP selection-.. according to power output of the switched appliance Appliance Voltage Power output [kW] 1.2 ÷ 3.4 2.3 ÷ 6.4 230 V a.c. 6.0 ÷ 14.5 3.4 ÷ 10.0 400 V a.c. 6.9 ÷ 19.3 18.0 ÷ 43.5

10, 01 250 V a.c. / 16 A 75 000 operating cycles max. 1200 operating cycles/h 0.75 ÷ 2.5 mm2 0.8 Nm

type RLP-.. RLP-15-.. RLP-28-.. RLP-63-.. RLP-15-.. RLP-28-.. RLP-63-..

E11


Minia

Other devices

PRIORITY CURRENT RELAYS Dimensions

Diagram

RLP-..

RLP-..-10

RLP-..-01

A1

1

A1

1

A1 1

45

I>

85.8

I>

A2

2

A2

2

2 A2

17.5

4.5

44 62

Connection examples

1

3

5

2

A2

L

RLP-...-10

A2

N

2

L1

4

L2

6

8

L3

1

A1

7

RSI-...-40-...

RLP-...-01

I>

L

A1

Electric heater

I>

2

A2

N

L

A1

L

T

16

18

T

A2

N

A1

1

3

5

7

A2

2

4

6

8

RSI-...-40-...

1

A1

N

Load with electronic control

Electric heater

MCR-08-001-UNI

Instantaneous water heater

15

L

N

L1

L2

L3

„For example, at blocking of consumption of an electric heater (a non-

„At priority switching of an appliance with electronic control the relay function is troubled

priority appliance) the current coil (terminals A1, A2) is connected in the circuit of an instantaneous water heater (a priority appliance) at switching the latter on, and control contact (terminals 1, 2) is connected in the circuit of the electric heater contactors. So if the instantaneous water heater is switched on and the current steeply reaches so called “guaranteed switched current”, the control break contact will interrupt the power supply of contactor, and subsequently disconnects the electric boiler.

(the relay is synchronized with the electronic control). For this reason it is recommended to connect a time-delay relay in the control contact circuit.

E12


Minia

Other devices

MULTIPLE-FUNCTION TIME RELAYS Multiple-function time relays „For switching of electric circuits up to 8 A depending on the set time, function and connection. „Mainly for automation purposes. „They can be used as a stair switch. „Time range: 0.1 s ÷ 100 h. „Big number of functions with various control options: delayed operation, impulse after switching on, interval relay beginning with a pause/impulse, reaction to leading/trailing edge, reaction to connection/ disconnection of supply voltage, reaction only to a control impulse edge, ... Rated voltage Type Un 230 V a.c. MCR-08-001-A230 universal 1) MCR-08-001-UNI 1) Universal rated voltage = 12 ÷ 230 V a.c. / d.c.

„Supply voltage: 230 V a.c. or universal

(12 ÷ 230 V a.c./d.c.). „Time and function setting by knobs and change-over

switches on the front panel of the device. „Light indication at contact closing 15-18. „Light indication of presence of supply voltage. „Each impulse led on input T causes restart of timing

depending on the set function.

Product code 35568 35569

Number of modules 1 1

Weight [kg] 0.115 0.115

Package [pcs] 1 1

Accessories Compensation block „it enables control of the relay by 1 to 3 control pushbuttons with glow discharge tube. „Connection: parallel with MCR. „Rated voltage: 230 V a.c. Type OD-MIR-BK

Product code 35676

„Max. voltage : 400 V a.c. „Capacity: 3 x 1 μF.

Number of modules 1

Weight [kg] 0.05

Package [pcs] 1

E13


Minia

Other devices

MULTIPLE-FUNCTION TIME RELAYS Description Change-over switch Un and TL „ for setting of starting method: Un – relay starts at connection of supply voltage or application of impulse on T terminal TL – relay starts by impulse application on terminal T

Terminals A1-A2 for connection of supply voltage Rated voltage Un = 12 ÷ 230 V a.c. / d.c. or 230 V a.c. In AC circuits L and N conductors can be arbitrarily connected to terminals A1, A2. In DC circuits the (+) conductor must be connected to terminal A1, and (-) to terminal A2.

„ „

Terminal T for control of relay „ Control impulse can be excited by connection of A1-T. „ Min./max. excitation time: 15 ms/compensated. „ The relay can be controlled by 1 to 3 control push-buttons with a glow discharge tube provided a power-factor capacitor 3 μF / 400 V is connected between terminals A2-T - see connection diagram. For compensation it is possible to use the compensation block OD-MIR-BK.

Change-over switch and for setting of response to control impulse edge leading edge of the control impulse trailing edge of the control impulse

L

„

N A1 T

Change-over switches IZ/ZP and MON/AST „ for function setting (for function table see page E16) IZ – impulse after switching on ZP – delayed operation MON – monostable function AST – astable function

A2 T

16 18

15

MCR-08-001-UNI

E14

"

minimum set time: 0.1 s maximum set time: 100 h

A2

"

Control knobs for switching time setting upper dial – defines time range – 1 s, 10 s, 1 min, 10 min, 1 hour, 10 hours, 100 hours lower dial – for setting of a multiple of the time range (0.05 ÷ 1)

„

OD-MIR-BK

Indication indication of operational states is solved by two-colour LED – presence of supply voltage Un is indicated by green colour – presence of supply voltage Un and closed contact 15-18 Re is indicated by orange colour

„


Minia

Other devices

MULTIPLE-FUNCTION TIME RELAYS Specifications Type

MCR-08-001-...

Standards Approval marks

EN 61812-1

Main circuit (contact) Arrangement of contacts 1) Rated operating voltage Rated current Max. switched power Max. switched voltage Min. voltage / current Mechanical endurance Electrical endurance Connection Torque Control circuit Rated voltage

001 250 V a.c., 24 V d.c. 8A 2000 VA / 192 W 380 V a.c. / 150 d.c. 5 V d.c. / 10 mA 5 000 000 operating cycles 100 000 operating cycles 0.2 ÷ 2.5 mm2 0.5 Nm

Ue In

Un

Dwell between applied Un Consumption at Un

type MCR-08-001-A230 type MCR-08-001-UNI

230 V 12 ÷ 230 V a.c. / d.c. 0.1 s 0.7 VA / 2.1 VA 0.9 W / 1.2 W 50 Hz 0.2 ÷ 2.5 mm2 0.5 Nm

at 12 / 230 V a.c. at 12 / 230 V d.c.

Rated frequency Connection Torque Control impulse Excitation 2) Min. excitation time Max. excitation time Consumption at Un

through interconnection of A1-T 15 ms compensated 0.5 VA / 0.5 VA 1W/1W

at 12 /230 V a.c. at 12 / 220 V d.c.

Time circuit Range 0.1 s ÷ 100 hours t setting method control knobs on the front panel Stability of set value at permanent power supply max. 2 % t Other data Mounting on “U” rail according to EN 60715 - type TH 35 Degree of protection IP20 Ambient temperature -20 ÷ + 50 °C Working position Arbitrary 1) Each digit indicates successively the number of make, break and break-make contacts 2) The relay can be controlled by 1 to 3 control push-buttons with a glow discharge tube provided a power-factor capacitor 3 μF / 400 V is connected between terminals A2-T. For compensation it is possible to use so called “Compensation block OD-MIR-BK” (1 module on DIN rail).

Dimensions MCR-08-001-..

OD-MIR-BK

A1 A2 T

18 16 15 17.5

~4.5

86

45

65.5

~88

86

45

65.5

~88

A2 A2 A2

24 17.5

44 62

2

~4.5

24 44 62

E15


Minia

Other devices

MULTIPLE-FUNCTION TIME RELAYS Diagram MCR A1

OD-MIR-BK T

16

18

T

A2

Graph

E16

15

A2


Minia

Other devices

TIME RELAYS „Possibility of selection of start of timing – delayed

„For periodical switching of electrical circuits up to 8 A

according to two mutually independent set times. „Mainly for automation purposes. „Time range: 0.5 s ÷ 120 min. „Universal supply voltage: 12 V ÷ 230 V a.c. / 12 V ÷ 220 V d.c.

operation/impulse after switching on. „Light indication at contact closing (red LED). „Light indication of presence of supply voltage (green

LED).

Time relays Rated voltage Un AC/DC [V] Universal 1) 1)

Type MTR-08-001-UNI

Product code 35570

Number of modules 1

Weight [kg] 0.075

Package [pcs] 1

Universal rated voltage = 12 ÷ 230 V a.c. / 12 ÷220 V d.c.

Description „Terminal ZP for setting of relay start

„Terminals A1-A2 for connection of supply voltage

- If the terminal is not interconnected, the relay starts in the mode of impulse after switching. - If the terminal is interconnected with terminal A1, the relay starts in delayed operation mode.

- Rated voltage Un = 12 ÷ 230 V a.c. / 12 ÷ 220 V d.c. - Conductor L and N or (+) and (-) can be connected arbitrarily to terminals A1, A2. „Control knobs and change-over switches t1 , t2

for switching time setting: - Minimum set time t1 or t2: 0,5 s. - Maximum set time t1 or t2: 120 min. - Stability of set value of t1 and t2 at permanent power supply - max 2 % t1 or t2 . - Scale of both t1 and t2 is linear. t1, t2 1 2

„Indication

- Indication of operational states is solved by two-colour LED - presence of supply voltage Un is indicated by green colour - presence of supply voltage Un and closed contact 15-18 Re is indicated by orange colour

t1, t2



1 2

1 2

1 2

0,5 s

12 s

5s

120 s

0,5 min

12 min

5 min

120 min

E17


Minia

Other devices

TIME RELAYS Specifications Type

MTR-08-001-UNI

Standards Approval marks

EN 61812-1

Main circuit (contact) Arrangement of contacts 1) Rated operating voltage Rated current Max. switched power Max. switched voltage Min. voltage/current Endurance - electrical/mechanical Connection Torque Control circuit (coil) Rated control voltage Dwell between applied Ue Consumption at Ue

Ue In

Un 12/230 V a.c. 12/220 V d.c.

Rated frequency Connection Torque Time circuit Range T setting method t1, t2 Stability of set value at permanent power supply Other data Mounting on “U” rail according to EN 60715 - type Degree of protection Ambient temperature Working position 1) Each digit indicates successively the number of make, break and break-make contacts

Dimensions MTR-08-001-UNI

17.5

~4.5

24 44 62

E18

2

86

45

18 16 15

65.5

~88

A1 A2 ZP

001 250 V a.c. / 24 V d.c. 8A 2000 VA / 192 W 380 V a.c., 150 V d.c. 5 V d.c. / 10 mA 100 000 operating cycles/5 000 000 operating cycles 0.2 ÷ 2.5 mm2 0.5 Nm 12 ÷ 230 V a.c. / 12 ÷ 220 V d.c. 3s 0.7 VA / 2.1 VA 0.9 W / 1.2 W 50 ÷ 60 Hz 0.2 ÷ 2.5 mm2 0.5 Nm 0.5 s ÷ 120 min control knobs and switches on the front panel max. 2 % t1, t2 TH 35 IP20 -20 ÷ 55 °C Arbitrary


Minia

Other devices

TIME RELAYS Diagram MTR-08-001-UNI A1

ZP 16

18

T

A2

15

Graph L N

L N

Un

Un

Re

Re t1

t2

t1

t2

t1

t2

t1

t2

Un – rated voltage Re – contact closing 15-18 t1 – set time on the switch t t1 and on the knob t1 t2 – set time on the switch t2 and on the knob t2

t1

t2

t1

t2

t1

t2

t1

t2

t1

t2

t1

t2

Un – rated voltage Re – contact closing 15-18 t1 – set time on the switch t t1 and on the knob t1 t2 – set time on the switch t2 and on the knob t2

E19


Minia

Other devices

IMPULSE MEMORY RELAY Impulse memory relay „For electric circuit switching up to 16 A by impulse command. „However, mainly for control of lighting circuits from more points in a corridor, on stairs, in the whole house etc. „It saves crossbar switches; the lighting can be controlled by push-buttons instead of a combination of crossbar and three-way switches. „It saves conductors - it is possible to use smaller crosssections for the control circuit than for power circuit. „It brings higher comfort of control - for example it is possible to switch off all lights by one push-button when leaving the house.

Control voltage Un 230

Type MIR-16-001-A230

„The relay does not need permanent power supply;

it is supplied only for the time of control impulse duration. „The position of the make-and-break contact can only be changed by applying an impulse on the following inputs (supply voltage failures have no effect): - ON/OFF input - each impulse led on this input changes the contact position (local control of the impulse relay). - ON input - each impulse led on this input switches the contact to position 11-14. - OFF input - each impulse led on this input switches the contact to position 11-12.

Product code 35675

Number of modules 1

Weight [kg] 0.085

Package [pcs] 1

Accessories Compensation block „It enables control of relay by more than 15 control pushbuttons with glow discharge tube. „Connection: parallel with MIR. „Rated voltage: 230 V a.c.

Type OD-MIR-BK

Product code 35676

Multi-level central control block „It enables multi-level central control of MIR. „Rated voltage: 230 V a.c.

Type OD-MIR-CO

E20

Product code 35677

„Max. voltage: 400 V a.c. „Capacity: 3 x 1 μF.

Number of modules 1

Weight [kg] 0.055

Package [pcs] 1

„Description: each impulse memory relay is locally

controlled by push-buttons (local control); each level or set of impulse memory relays is controlled simultaneously from relevant point (central control); all levels are jointly controlled by a single command from a point (central multi-level control).

Number of modules 1

Weight [kg] 0.05

Package [pcs] 1


Minia

Other devices

IMPULSE MEMORY RELAY Specifications Type

MIR-16-001-A230

Standards Approval marks

EN 61812-1

Main circuit (contact) Arrangement of contacts Rated operating voltage Rated current

1) 2)

Ue In

001 230 V a.c. 16 A 2A 4000 VA 460 W 8x 36 W 25x 36 W, 13x 65 W 50 mW (10 V / 5 mA) 50 Hz 10 000 000 operating cycles 100 000 operating cycles 10 operating cycles/min 0.2 ÷ 2.5 mm2 0.5 Nm

AC-1 AC-5a

Max. switched power 2) Lamp load max. Max. fluorescent tube load

compensated cos φ = 0.8 uncompensated cos φ = 0.5

Min. switched power fn Rated frequency Mechanical endurance Electrical endurance Switching frequency Connection Torque Control circuit Uc Rated voltage 230 V a.c. fn Rated frequency 50 Hz Min. excitation time 200 ms Max. excitation time compensated Min. time period between pulses 1s Max. number of push-buttons with glow lamp 1.1 mA 15 pcs 3) Connection 0.2 ÷ 2.5 mm2 Torque 0.5 Nm Other data Mounting on “U” rail according to EN 60715 - type TH 35 Degree of protection IP20 Ambient temperature -20 ÷ + 50 °C Working position Arbitrary 1) Each digit indicates successively the number of make, break and break-make contacts 2) Different contact sequence or load increase can be solved by the use of installation contactors RSI 3) On ON input and OFF output there must be the same number of push-buttons with a glow discharge tube. For the number of push-buttons with a glow discharge tube higher than 15 it is necessary to use the compensation bloc OD-MIR-BK

Dimensions A2 A2 A2

5 6 8

45

~88

A2 A2 A2

OD-MIR-CO

86

OD-MIR-BK

65.5

MIR-16-001-A230

ON/OFF

ON OFF 14 12 11 17.5

4 2 7 17.5

17.5

~4.5

24 44 62

E21


Minia

Other devices

IMPULSE MEMORY RELAY Graph

Diagram MIR-16-001-A230 A2

ON/OFF

12

OD-MIR-BK

14

A2

OD-MIR-CO 5

6

8

7

2

4

ON OFF 11 11-14

ON/OFF ON OFF

Connection examples Local control Â&#x201E;Each relay is locally controlled by push-buttons.

N

L

ON/OFF

A2 12 11

14

MIR-16-001-A230 Local control of impulse relays

ON/OFF

A2 12 11

14

MIR-16-001-A230

E22


Minia

Other devices

IMPULSE MEMORY RELAY Local + central control

Local + central + central multi-level control

„Each impulse relay is locally controlled by push-buttons (local control); each

„Each impulse relay is locally controlled by push-buttons (local control); each level or set of impulse

level or set of impulse relays is controlled simultaneously from a point (central control); all levels are jointly controlled by a single command from a point (central control).

L

N

Central control of the 1st group impulse relays

A2

ON

relays is controlled simultaneously from a point (central control); all levels are jointly controlled by a single command from a point (central control); all levels are jointly controlled by a single command from a point (central multi-level control).

L

ON OFF

OFF 12 11

A2

ON

7

4

5

8

OFF 12

14

11

MIR-16-001-A230

Local control of impulse relays

A2

A2

12

12

14

11

MIR-16-001-A230

14

MIR-16-001-A230

Central control of the 2st group impulse relays

Central control of the 2st group impulse relays

A2

ON

14

MIR-16-001-A230

Local control of impulse relays

11

N

Central control of the 1st group impulse relays

Central control of the 1st and 2st group impulse relays

A2

ON

2

OFF

OFF

6

12

12

OD-MIR-CO

11

14

11

MIR-16-001-A230

MIR-16-001-A230

Local control of impulse relays

11

14

Local control of impulse relays

A2

A2

12

12

14

11

MIR-16-001-A230

14

MIR-16-001-A230

Connection of signalling of pushed button „When the connection of signalling of pushed button is done according to the figure relay can be controlled only by ON/OFF input. In such case of signalling connection when the ON or OFF button is pushed the current is closed through the relay electronics and thus can damage it.

N

L

N

L

Signalling of pushed button

Signalling of pushed button I

ON/OFF

ON/OFF

A2

A2

ON OFF

12 11

14

MIR-16-001-A230

12 11

14

MIR-16-001-A230

E23


Minia

Other devices

STAIR SWITCHES Stair switch MQA-.. „Mainly for control of lighting circuits from more points in a corridor, on stairs, in the whole house etc. „Possibility of 3-wire or 4-wire connection.

Type MQA-16-100-A230

Product code 37210

Stair switch MQB-.. „Mainly for control of lighting circuits from more points in a corridor, on stairs, in the whole house etc. „Possibility of 3-wire or 4-wire connection. „Time setting (0.5 ÷10 min) by the knob on the front panel of the device. „If the control push-button is pressed longer than 1 s, the stair switch will switch on for a time four times longer than the set time. Type MQB-16-100-A230

Product code 37211

Stair switch MQC-.. „Mainly for control of lighting circuits from more points in a corridor, on stairs, in the whole house etc. „Possibility of 3-wire or 4-wire connection. „Time setting (3 ÷ 60 min) by the knob on the front panel of the device. „Max. 50 control push-buttons with glow lamp 1 mA.

Type MQC-16-100-A230

E24

Product code 37830

„Time setting (0.5 ÷10 min) by the knob on the front

panel of the device. „Max. 50 control push-buttons with glow lamp 1 mA.

Number of modules 1

Weight [kg] 0.086

Package [pcs] 1

„Max. 50 control push-buttons with glow lamp 1 mA. „Warning before expiration of the set time - 20 and 40

seconds before expiration of the set time the stair switch warns by indicator short flashing of oncoming end of timing.

Number of modules 1

Weight [kg] 0.086

Package [pcs] 1

„Warning before expiration of the set time - 20 and 40

seconds before expiration of the set time the stair switch warns by indicator short flashing of oncoming end of timing. „The timing is terminated by pressing the push-button again before 40 seconds to the end of the set time.The timing cycle is restarted by pressing the push-button again 40 or less seconds to the end of the set time.

Number of modules 1

Weight [kg] 0.086

Package [pcs] 1


Minia

Other devices

STAIR SWITCHES Specifications Type

MQA-16-100-A230

MQB-16-100-A230

MQC-16-100-A230

Standards Approval marks

EN 60 669

EN 60 669

EN 61 812-1

10 250 V a.c. 16 A 10 A 2000 W 20 pcs 58 W 40 pcs 58 W 2x 20 pcs 58 W 5 pcs 20 W 10 pcs 58 W 10 V / 300 mA 50/60 Hz 1.5 ÷ 6 mm2 1.2 Nm

10 250 V a.c. 16 A 10 A 2000 W 20 pcs 58 W 40 pcs 58 W 2x 20 pcs 58 W 5 pcs 20 W 10 pcs 58 W 10 V / 300 mA 50/60 Hz 1.5 ÷ 6 mm2 1.2 Nm

10 250 V a.c. 16 A 10 A 2000 W 20 pcs 58 W 40 pcs 58 W 2x 20 pcs 58 W 5 pcs 20 W 10 pcs 58 W 10 V / 300 mA 50/60 Hz 1.5 ÷ 6 mm2 1.2 Nm

230 V a.c. 90 ÷ 110 % Uc 50 Hz 0.7 W 3.5 W 0.5 ÷ 10 min 30 ms compensated 50 pcs yes no no 1.5 ÷ 6 mm2 1.2 Nm

230 V a.c. 90 ÷ 110 % Uc 50 Hz 1W 1.7 W 0.5 ÷ 10 min 30 ms compensated 50 pcs yes yes 3) yes 4) 1.5 ÷ 6 mm2 1.2 Nm

230 V a.c. 90 ÷ 110 % Uc 50 Hz 1W 1.7 W 3 ÷ 60 min 30 ms compensated 50 pcs yes no yes 4) 1.5 ÷ 6 mm2 1.2 Nm

Main circuit (contact) Arrangement of contacts 1) Rated operating voltage Rated current Inductive load Lamp load max. Max. fluorescent tube load

Min. switched power Rated frequency Connection Torque Control circuit Rated control voltage Range of control voltage Rated frequency Power loss

Ue In

AC-1 cosφ 0.6 uncompensated compensated in series duo connection EVG = electronic ballast Siemens ECG

fn

Uc fn at standstill at timing process

Time setting Min. excitation time Max. excitation time 2) Max. number of push-buttons with glow lamp 1 mA Reset by next impulse Additional extension of the set time Warning before end of timing Connection Torque Other data Mounting on “U” rail according to EN 60715 - type TH 35 TH 35 Degree of protection IP20 IP20 Ambient temperature -10 ÷ + 50 °C -10 ÷ + 50 °C Working position arbitrary arbitrary 1) Each digit indicates successively the number of make and break contacts. 2) The device is able to withstand permanent load either in switching the manual change-over switch on the front panel of the device or in control push-button locking. 3) If the control push-button is closed for more than 1 s, the set time is extended four times. 4) 20 and 40 seconds before expiration of the set time the stair switch warns by indicator short flashing of oncoming end of timing.

TH 35 IP20 -10 ÷ + 50 °C arbitrary

E25


Minia

Other devices

STAIR SWITCHES Dimensions

Diagram

MQA-16-100-A230, MQB-16-100-A230, MQC-16-100-A230

MQA-16-100-A230 MQB-16-100-A230 MQC-16-100-A230 N

90

67

45

L

1

N 1

2

2 L 18

7

24 44 64

Connection examples

1.5

4-wire connection

3-wire connection

230 V a.c.

230 V a.c.

Stair switch is controlled by switching of the phase conductor. This connection is used mainly in new installations. MQA-16-100-A230

Graph

Stair switch is controlled by switching of the N-conductor. This connection is used only in old installations. MQB-16-100-A230

Un

Un

t<1s L-2

t<1s

t<1s

t>1s

L-2 te

t<te

te te

20 s 40 s

t<t e

te

4x t

MQC-16-100-A230 Un

L-2

te

E26

20 s 40 s

te>t>te-40 s

20 s 40 s

te-40 s>t te


Minia

Other devices

TIMERS Mechanical program timer „For real time load switching up to 16 A / 250 V. „Daily program. „Switching time setting: by plastic plates along the perimeter of the dial.

„Shortest switching interval: 30 min. „Change-over switch automatic run / permanent opera-

tion / permanent off. „Run reserve: 100 hours.

Design

Arrangement Type Product Number code of modules of contacts 1) standard 001 MAP-16-001-A230 36879 3 mini 100 MAP-16-100-A230-MINI 36880 1 1) Each digit indicates successively the number of make, break and break-make contacts

Digital program timer „For switching of of load of max. 16 A / 250 V a.c. in real time. „Weekly and daily program. „Switching time setting: by push-buttons on the front panel of the device.

Weight [kg] 0.175 0.1

Package [pcs] 1 1

„Shortest switching interval: 1 min. „Change-over switch automatic run / permanent opera-

tion / permanent off. „Run reserve: 6 years from the manufacture date.

Number Arrangement Type Product Number of channels of contacts 1) code of modules 1 001 MAR-16-001-A230 36881 2 2 002 MAR-16-002-A230 36882 2 1) Each digit indicates successively the number of make, break and break-make contacts

Weight [kg] 0.24 0.24

Package [pcs] 1 1

Specifications Type Approval marks Main circuit (contact) Arrangement of contacts Rated operating voltage Rated current Switched power

Ue Ie

AC-1 AC-1 AC-3 AC-5a uncompensated AC-5a compensated 7 μF AC-5b

MAP-16-001-A230

MAP-16-100-A230-MINI MAR-16-001-A230

MAR-16-002-A230

001 250 V a.c. 16 A 3 600 W 1 000 W 1 400 VA 58 W 1 000 W 4 V / 1 mA 50 Hz 20 000 000 operating cycles 100 000 operating cycles 1.5 ÷ 4 mm2 1.2 Nm

100 250 V a.c. 16 A 3 600 W 1 000 W 1 400 VA 58 W 1 000 W 4 V / 1 mA 50 Hz 20 000 000 operating cycles 100 000 operating cycles 1.5 ÷ 4 mm2 1.2 Nm

001 250 V a.c. 16 A 3 600 W 1 800 W 1 400 VA 60 W 1 800 W 12 V / 100 mA 50 Hz 10 000 000 operating cycles 100 000 operating cycles 1.5 ÷ 4 mm2 1.2 Nm

002 250 V a.c. 16 A 3 600 W 1 800 W 1 400 VA 60 W 1 800 W 12 V / 100 mA 50 Hz 10 000 000 operating cycles 100 000 operating cycles 1.5 ÷ 4 mm2 1.2 Nm

15 min 15 min daily ± 2.5 s / day ± 5 min 100 hours NiMH min 48 hours

1 min 1 min weekly 56 Mo-Su, Mo-Fr, Sa-Su, individual ± 0.86 s / day 6 years Lithium -

1 min 1 min weekly 28 on each channel Mo-Su, Mo-Fr, Sa-Su, individual ± 0.86 s / day 6 years Lithium -

230 V a.c. 85 ÷ 110 % Uc 50 / 60 Hz 1VA 1.5 ÷ 4 mm2 1.2 Nm

230 V a.c. 85 ÷ 110 % Uc 50 / 60 Hz 2 VA 1.5 ÷ 4 mm2 1.2 Nm

230 V a.c. 85 ÷ 110 % Uc 50 / 60 Hz 2 VA 1.5 ÷ 4 mm2 1.2 Nm

TH 35 IP20 -10 ÷ + 55 °C arbitrary

TH 35 IP20 -10 ÷ + 55 °C arbitrary

TH 35 IP20 -10 ÷ + 55 °C arbitrary

Min. switched power fn Rated frequency Mechanical endurance Electrical endurance Connection Torque Time circuit Min. switching interval 30 min Min. time unit 15 min Program daily Number of memory places Pre-set blocks in the week Run accuracy ± 2.5 s / day Switching accuracy ± 5 min Run reserve 100 hours Battery type NiMH Charging time min 48 hours Supply circuit Uc 230 V a.c. Rated control voltage Operating range 85 ÷ 110 % Uc fn Rated frequency 50 / 60 Hz Pv 1 VA Rated power loss Connection 1.5 ÷ 4 mm2 Torque 1.2 Nm Other data Mounting on “U” rail according to EN 60715 - type TH 35 Degree of protection IP20 Ambient temperature -10 ÷ + 55 °C Working position arbitrary 1) Each digit indicates successively the number of make, break and break-make contacts

E27


Minia

Other devices

TIMERS Dimensions MAP-16-001-A230

MAP-16-100-A230-MINI

6

17.8

44

44 64

64

N L

4 1 2 L 89

89

45

MAR-16-002-A230

83

MAR-16-001-A230

N 6 5 8

2 1 4

6

44

6

36 64

2

U2

E28

MAP-16-100-A230-MINI

44 64

Diagram U1

45

6

MAP-16-001-A230

83

1 4

53

36

45

U1 U2 1 4 2

83

88

45

89

83

N L

MAR-16-001-A230

4

L

4

L

1

N

1

N

2

MAR-16-002-A230

4

L

1

N

2

4

1

6

8

5


Minia

Other devices

TUMBLER POWER SWITCHES Tumbler power switches APN-.. „For building, commercial and industrial installations up to 63 A, 230/400 V a.c. „For electric circuit switching.

Rated operating current Ie

32 A

63 A

Number of poles 1 1+N 2 3 3+N 1 1+N 2 3 3+N

Type APN-32-1 APN-32-1N APN-32-2 APN-32-3 APN-32-3N APN-63-1 APN-63-1N APN-63-2 APN-63-3 APN-63-3N

„Wide range of accessories – auxiliary switches, undervol-

tage releases and shunt trips, interconnecting busbars etc. „Possible interconnection by means of busbars.

Product code 34338 34339 34340 34341 34342 34343 34344 34345 34346 34347

Number of modules 1 2 2 3 4 1 2 2 3 4

Weight [kg] 0.12 0.235 0.235 0.355 0.47 0.12 0.235 0.235 0.355 0.47

Package [pcs] 12 6 6 4 3 12 6 6 4 3

Accessories Auxiliary and relative switches Shunt trips Undervoltage releases Locking insert Sealing insert Interpole barriers Interconnecting busbars Terminal extensions

PS-LP-.. SV-LP-.. SP-LP-.. OD-LP-VU01 OD-LP-VP01 OD-LP-MP01 G1L-.., G2L-.., G3L-.., G4L-.., S1L-.., S2L-.., S3L-.. AS-..

Tumbler power switches AST-.. „For building, commercial and industrial installations up to 125 A, 230/400 V a.c., 48 V d.c. „For electric circuit switching.

Rated current In 125 A

Number of poles 1 3 3+N

Type AST-125-1 AST-125-3 AST-125-3N

page B19 page B22 page B25 page B28 page B29 page B30 page E49 page E54

„Wide range of accessories – auxiliary switches,

undervoltage releases and shunt trips, interconnecting busbars etc. „Possible interconnection by means of busbars. Product code 37284 37285 37286

Number of modules 1.5 4.5 6

Weight [kg] 0.21 0.63 0.84

Package [pcs] 3 1 1

Accessories Auxiliary switches Shunt trips Undervoltage releases Interconnecting busbars Terminal extensions

PS-LS-.. SV-LS-.. SP-LS-.. S1L-27-.., S3L-27-.., S4L-27-.. AS-50-S-AL01, CS-FH000-.., N3x10-FH000

page B19 page B22 page B25 page E49 page E54

E29


Minia

Other devices

TUMBLER POWER SWITCHES Specifications Type

APN-..

AST-..

Standards Approval marks

EN 60947-3

EN 60947-3

1, 1+N, 2, 3, 3+N 32 A, 63 A 230/400 V a.c. 253/440 V a.c. 12 V a.c./d.c. 40 ÷ 60 Hz 10 kA 20 000 operating cycles 4 000 operating cycles 6 kV IV AC-22A TH 35 IP20

1, 3, 3+N 125 A 230/400 V a.c., 48 V d.c. 253/440 V a.c., 52 V d.c. 12 V a.c./d.c. 40 ÷ 60 Hz 10 kA 10 000 operating cycles 4 000 operating cycles 6 kV IV AC-22A, DC-22A TH 35 IP20

0.5 ÷ 25 mm2, 2x(0.5÷10) mm2 0.5 ÷ 16 mm2 2 Nm yes

1.5 ÷ 50 mm2, 2x16 mm2 1.5 ÷ 50 mm2, 2x16 mm2 3.5 Nm yes

-20 ÷ + 55 °C arbitrary

-20 ÷ + 55 °C arbitrary

Number of poles Rated operating current Rated operating voltage Max. operating voltage Min. operating voltage Rated frequency Rated conditional short-circuit current with backup fuse max 1:1 gG Mechanical endurance Electrical endurance Rated impulse withstand voltage (1.2/50 μs) Overvoltage category (IEC 664-1) Utilization category Mounting on “U” rail according to EN 60715 - type Degree of protection Connection Conductor Cu – rigid (solid stranded) Conductor Cu – flexible Torque Top or bottom connection Operating conditions Ambient temperature Working position

Ie Ue Umax Umin fn

Uimp

Dimensions APN-..-3

APN-..-3N

~73 64

~4.5

17.5

52.5

35

45 ~4.5

70

44 72

AST-..-1

AST-..-3

AST-..-3N

45 1.7 26.6

79.8

106.4

5.5

44 60 70 74

E30

90

71.5

86

APN-..-1N APN-..-2

~90

APN-..-1


Minia

Other devices

TUMBLER POWER SWITCHES Diagram APN-..-1, AST-..-1

APN-..-1N

APN-..-2

1

1

N1

1

3

APN-..-3, AST-..-3 1

3

5

APN-..-3N, AST-..-3N 1

3

5

N1

2

2

N2

2

4

2

4

6

2

4

6

N2

E31


Minia

Other devices

TUMBLER POWER SWITCHES „Switch-disconnector, in particular for photovoltaic applica-

tions with high rated operating voltage up to 1000 V d.c. „New terminal system. „Easy connection and check of conductors. „Possibility of connection up to 4 conductors in the terminal.

„Possibility of connection conductors of various cross

sections. „Easy installation by means of the new clip system on or

from DIN rail.

Switch-disconnector AVN-DC-63-4 Rated operating current 63 A

Type AVN-DC-63-4

Product code 39752

Auxiliary switch PS-LV-1100 „Accessories to AVN-DC-63-4. „Installation: on the right side of the switch-disconnector. „For signalling the position of contacts of the switchdisconnector.

Number of modules 4

Weight [kg] 0.672

„Rated operating voltage / current: AC-14 230 V / 6 A,

DC-13 220 V / 1 A. „Connection of conductors: 0.75 ÷ 2.5 mm2.

Arrangement Type Product of contacts code PS-LV-1100-K 38938 11 1) 1) Each digit indicates successively the number of make and break contacts

Number of modules 0.5

Weight [kg] 0.05

Specifications Type

AVN-DC-63-4

Standards Approval marks

EN 60947-3, IEC/EN 60669-1

Number of poles Rated operating current Rated operating voltage in connection 4 poles in series Min. voltage / current Rated short-time withstand current DC-1000 V 4 pole Rated short-circuit making capacity DC-1000 V 4 pole Mechanical endurance Electrical endurance Rated power losses per pole Rated impulse withstand voltage (1.2/50 μs) Utilization category Mounting on “U” rail according to EN 60715 - type Degree of protection Connection Conductor Cu – rigid (solid, stranded) Conductor Cu – flexible ( with a sleeve) Torque Top or bottom connection Operating conditions Ambient temperature Working position 1) It is necessary to observe the polarity marked on the device

E32

Package [pcs] 1

Ie Ue Icw Icm

Uimp

4 63 A 1000 V d.c. 24 V / 300 mA 760 A 500 A 10 000 operating cycles 5 000 operating cycles 4.4 W > 5 kV DC-21B TH 35 IP20 0.75 ÷ 35 mm2 0.75 ÷ 25 mm2 2.5 ÷ 3 Nm yes 1) -25 ÷ + 45 °C Arbitrary

Package [pcs] 1


Minia

Other devices

TUMBLER POWER SWITCHES Diagram PS-LV-1100

AVN-DC-63-4

-

1

+

3

-

+ 2

-

5

+

13

21

14

22

-

+ 4

7

6

8

Dimensions PS-LV-1100

72

6

44

9

64

73.3

45

90

45

35

90

.

6

90

AVN-DC-63-4

44 64

70

68.5

Connection Both grounded and ungrounded systems 1000 V d.c.

Only ungrounded system 1000 V d.c.

Load

E33


Minia

Other devices

TUMBLER POWER SWITCHES Interconnecting busbars S1L-...

Connection of conductors and interconnecting busbars Terminal system Design: two levels of terminals with a fixed barrier between them. Connection: each level enables connection of both the conductor and interconnecting busbar (interconnecting busbars with pins, type „S“ are shown on page E52). This is possible from both sides of the device. For connection range see the table below. Safety: the terminals are equipped with sliding plastic caps, which effectively increase protection against dangerous contact with live parts.

Level 1

Barrier

Level 2 Interconnecting busbars S1L-...

Advantages Possibility of connection: „ conductors of various cross sections „ up to 4 conductors in the terminal „ conductor of cross section up to 35 mm2

Mounting/demounting on/from „DIN“ rails New system of latches enables: „ very quick mounting and demounting by hand, without any tool needed. „ withdrawal/replacement of the switch-disconnector from a row of devices interconnected by the interconnecting busbar up or down without interruption of adjacent circuit or removal of the busbar.

Connection range Number of connected conductors 1× conductor

2× conductor

Rigid conductor (solid, stranded) Level 1 Level 2 2 1× ( ≤ 35 mm ) 1× ( ≤ 25 mm2) 2 2× ( ≤ 10 mm ) 2× ( ≤ 6 mm2) 1× ( ≤ 35 mm2) 1× ( ≤ 10 mm2) 1× ( ≤ 25 mm2) 1× ( ≤ 16 mm2) 2 1× ( ≤ 16 mm ) 1× ( ≤ 25 mm2) 2 2× ( ≤ 6 mm2) 1× ( ≤ 35 mm )

3× conductor 4× conductor

E34

2× ( ≤ 10 mm2) 2× ( ≤ 10 mm2)

1× ( ≤ 25 mm2) 2× ( ≤ 6 mm2)

Conductor flexible with a sleeve Level 1 Level 2 2 1× ( ≤ 25 mm ) 1× ( ≤ 16 mm2) 2 2× ( ≤ 6 mm ) 2× ( ≤ 4 mm2) 1× ( ≤ 25 mm2) 1× ( ≤ 6 mm2) 1× ( ≤ 16 mm2) 1× ( ≤ 25 mm2) 1× ( ≤ 16 mm2) 2× ( ≤ 6 mm2) 2× ( ≤ 6 mm2)

1× ( ≤ 16 mm2) 2× ( ≤ 2,5 mm2) 2× ( ≤ 4 mm2) 1× ( ≤ 16 mm2) 2× ( ≤ 4 mm2)


Minia

Other devices

TUMBLER SWITCHES Tumbler switches „For switching of up to 4 electric circuits up to 25 A. „They can be used in both building and industrial installations and in security technology. „Modular design with fastening on the „U“ rail wide 35 mm according to EN 60715.

Arrangement Type Product of contacts 1) code 11 MSP-11 35865 22 MSP-22 35870 40 MSP-40 35874 1) Each digit indicates successively the number of make and break contacts

Tumbler switches with signalling „For electric circuit switching up to 25 A. „They can be used in both building and industrial installations and in security technology. „Modular design with fastening on the „U“ rail wide 35 mm according to EN 60715.

Number of modules 1 1 1

Weight [kg] 0.084 0.094 0.094

Package [pcs] 1 1 1

„Installed indicator light of white colour 230 V a.c. can be

replaced by other one. „Indicator light is connected between the contact and

the terminal (see the diagram).

Colour Arrangement Type Product code of indicator light of contacts 1) 11 MSP-11-SG-A230 37262 white 20 MSP-20-SG-A230 37263 1) Each digit indicates successively the number of make and break contacts

Number of modules 1 1

Weight [kg] 0.0940 0.0940

Package [pcs] 1 1

Accessories Indicator lights „Accessories for tumbler switches with signalling as substitute for the installed white indicator light.

Colour of cover red green yellow white

Rated voltage 230 V a.c. 24 V a.c./d.c. 230 V a.c. 24 V a.c./d.c. 230 V a.c. 24 V a.c./d.c. 230 V a.c. 24 V a.c./d.c.

Type SC-A230 SC-X024 SE-A230 SE-X024 SD-A230 SD-X024 SG-A230 SG-X024

„Indicator light power: 0.8 W „Indicator light contains a LED. „Indicator lights light permanently. Product code 11102 11106 11103 11107 11104 11108 11101 11105

Weight [kg] 0.003 0.003 0.003 0.003 0.003 0.003 0.003 0.003

Package [pcs] 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12

E35


Minia

Other devices

TUMBLER SWITCHES Specifications Type

MSP-..

MSP-..-SG-A230

Standards Approval marks

EN 60947-5-1

EN 60947-5-1

11, 22, 40 230/400 V a.c., 220 V d.c. 25 A 25 A 6A 1A 30 000 operating cycles 0.75 ÷ 6 mm2, 2x(0.75 ÷ 2.5) mm2 0.8 Nm

11, 20 230/400 V a.c., 220 V d.c. 25 A 25 A 6A 1A 30 000 operating cycles 0.75 ÷ 6 mm2, 2x(0.75 ÷ 2.5) mm2 0.8 Nm

Contacts Arrangement of contacts Rated operating voltage Rated thermal current Rated operating current

1)

Ue Ith Ie

AC-12 AC-15 DC-12

Mechanical endurance Connection Torque Light signalling Power output Ue Rated operating voltage Colour of cover Light Source Dispersion Connection Torque Other data Mounting on “U” rail according to EN 60715 - type TH 35 Degree of protection IP20 Ambient temperature -25 ÷ +55 °C Working position arbitrary 1) Each digit indicates successively the number of make and break contacts. 2) Tumbler switch with signalling contains a white indicator light; other colour can be bought as accessories.

0.8 W 24 V a.c./d.c., 230 V a.c. white, red, green, yellow 2) permanent LED by raster in front of LED 0.75 ÷ 6 mm2, 2x(0.75 ÷ 2.5) mm2 0.8 Nm TH 35 IP20 -25 ÷ +55 °C arbitrary

Dimensions

2

4

6

8 17.5

5.5

86

3

45

7

1

89

5

65.5

MSP-..

24 44 60

10

Diagram MSP-11

E36

MSP-22

MSP-40

MSP-11-SG-A230

1

3

1

3

5

7

1

3

5

7

1

2

4

2

4

6

8

2

4

6

8

2 (+)

4

MSP-20-SG-A230 5

1

6

2 (+)

5

4

6


Other devices

Minia

TUMBLER SWITCHES Replacement of indicator light „Installed indicator lights of white colour can be replaced by other ones (see accessories).

Indicator light demounting: 1) Insert demounting tool (e.g. paper-clip) in the demounting hole and push to ensure that the indicator light jumps up a little. 2) Remove the indicator light from the tumbler switch.

Installation of indicator light: 3) Insert and press the indicator light in the hole in the tumbler switch.

3 demounting hole

demounting tool 2 1

Connection examples „The indicator light can be connected in two ways:

– to indicate load connection – to indicate voltage presence and to enable easy finding of the switch during the night-time L1

L2

N load

load

5 5

4

2

6

MSP-20-SG-A230

1

2 load

4

6

MSP-20-SG-A230

1

load L1

Indicator light indicates load connection

N

L2

Indicator light indicates presence of voltage

E37


Minia

Other devices

ROCKER-TYPE SWITCHES AND CHANGE-OVER SWITCHES Rocker-type switches and change-over switches „For electric circuit switching up to 16 A. „Use in both building and industrial installations and security technology. „Switches with backlighting (glow lamp). „Change-over switches with interposition.

Design

Arrangement of contacts 1) 10 10 10 001

Type

„Change-over switches with interposition without

arresting. „Modular design with fastening on the „U“ rail wide

35 mm according to EN 60715.

Product code 35678 35679 35680 35682

Switch MSK-10 Switch with red backlight MSK-10-SC Switch with green backlight MSK-10-SE Change-over switch MSK-001-1X2 Change-over switch with 001 MSK-001-102 35681 intermediate position Change-over switch with interme001 MSK-001-1T2 35683 diate position without arrestment 1) Each digit indicates successively the number of make, break and break-make contacts

Number of modules 1 1 1 1

Weight [kg] 0.065 0.065 0.065 0.065

Package [pcs] 1 1 1 1

1

0.065

1

1

0.065

1

Specifications Type

MSK-10 MSK-10-..

MSK-001-1X2

MSK-001-102 MSK-001-1T2

Standards

EN 60947-5-1 EN 60669-1 EN 60073 EN 61058-1

EN 60947-5-1 EN 60669-1 EN 60073 EN 61058-1

EN 60947-5-1 EN 60669-1 EN 60073 EN 61058-1

10 250 V a.c., 12 V d.c. 300 mW 12 V 16 A 16 A 10 A 6A 2A 4.4 A 10 A 50 000 operating cycles 100 000 op. cycles 0.2 ÷ 2.5 mm2 0.5 Nm

001 250 V a.c., 12 V d.c. 300 mW 12 V 10 A 10 A 6A 4A 1.1 A 2.6 A 10 A 50 000 operating cycles 100 000 op. cycles 0.2 ÷ 2.5 mm2 0.5 Nm

001 250 V a.c., 12 V d.c. 300 mW 12 V 6A 6A 4A 3A 0.7 A 1.7 A 10 A 50 000 operating cycles 50 000 operating cycles 0.2 ÷ 2.5 mm2 0.5 Nm

TH 35 IP20 -20 ÷ +55 °C arbitrary

TH 35 IP20 -20 ÷ +55 °C arbitrary

Approval marks Contacts Arrangement of contacts Rated operating voltage Min. switched power Min. voltage Rated thermal current Rated operating current

1)

Ue Umin Ith Ie

AC-1 AC-15 AC-5a - cosφ=0,5 AC-5a - cosφ=0,9 AC-5b DC-1

Electrical endurance Mechanical endurance Connection Torque Other data Mounting on “U” rail according to EN 60715 - type TH 35 Degree of protection IP20 Ambient temperature -20 ÷ +55 °C Working position arbitrary 1) Each digit indicates successively the number of make, break and break-make contacts

E38


Minia

Other devices

ROCKER-TYPE SWITCHES AND CHANGE-OVER SWITCHES Dimensions MSK-..

86

45

65.5

88

1 1 1

4

17.5

2

4.5

24 44 6.5

62

Diagram MSK-10

MSK-10-..

MSK-001-1X2

MSK-001-102

I 1

2

1

2

2 4

1 II

MSK-001-1T2

I 1

o

I 2

1

o

4 II

2 4

Ia

4

E39


Minia

Other devices

PUSH-BUTTON SWITCHES Push-button switches „They can be used in both building and industrial installations and in security technology. „For electric circuit switching up to 25 A.

„The circuit is switched on permanently by upper green

push-button, and switched off by lower red push-button. „Already installed push-button can be replaced. „Modular design with fastening on the „U“ rail wide

35 mm according to EN 60715. Arrangement Type Product Number code of modules of contacts 1) 22 MST-22 35555 1 1) Each digit indicates successively the number of make and break contacts

Weight [kg] 0.12

Package [pcs] 1

Accessories Push-buttons „They are intended for replacement of the already installed push-buttons. Colour

Type

red green black white

TC TE TB TG

Product code 8930 8931 8932 8934

Weight [kg] 0.002 0.002 0.002 0.002

Package [pcs] 12 12 12 12

Specifications Type

MST-22

Standards Approval marks

EN 60947-5-1

Contacts Arrangement of contacts Rated operating voltage Rated thermal current Rated operating current

1)

Ue Ith Ie

AC-12 AC-15 DC-12

22 230/400 V a.c., 220 V d.c. 25 A 25 A 6A 1A 30 000 operating cycles 0.75 ÷ 6 mm2, 2x(0.75 ÷ 2.5) mm2 0.8 Nm

Mechanical endurance Connection Torque Push-buttons Colour black, red, green, white Other data Mounting on “U” rail according to EN 60715 - type TH 35 Degree of protection IP20 Ambient temperature -25 ÷ +55 °C Working position Arbitrary 1) Each digit indicates successively the number of make and break contacts 2) Push-button switch contains red and green push-button; the other colours can be bought as accessories

E40

2)


Minia

Other devices

PUSH-BUTTON SWITCHES Dimensions

2

4

6

8 17.5

5.5

86

3

45

7

1

89

5

65.5

MST-22

24 44 62

7

Diagram MST-22

blocking mechanism

1

3

5

7

2

4

6

8

Replacement of push-button Â&#x201E;Installed push-button can be replaced by other one (see accessories).

Push-button demounting: 1) Insert demounting tool (e.g. paper-clip) in the demounting hole to ensure that the pushbutton jumps up a little. 2) Remove push-button from push-button switch.

demounting hole

1

2

2

Installation of a push-button: 3) Insert and press the push-button in the hole in the push-button switch. For push-button, under which there is a spring, it is first necessary to cut the lug, and only after it insert it in the hole in the push-button switch and press it.

demounting tool 3

3

1

E41


Minia

Other devices

CONTROL PUSH-BUTTONS Control push-buttons „They can be used in both building and industrial installations and in security technology. „For switching of electric circuits up to 25 A.

„Already installed push-button can be replaced. „Modular design with fastening on the „U“ rail wide

35 mm according to EN 60715.

Colour of push-button black

Arrangement Type Product code of contacts 1) 01 MTX-01-TB 37265 10 MTX-10-TB 37268 22 MTX-22-TB 37271 red 01 MTX-01-TC 37266 10 MTX-10-TC 37269 22 MTX-22-TC 37272 green 01 MTX-01-TE 37267 10 MTX-10-TE 37270 22 MTX-22-TE 37273 1) Each digit indicates successively the number of make and break contacts

Control push-buttons with signalling „They can be used in both building and industrial installations and in security technology. „For switching of electric circuits up to 25 A.

Number of modules 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Weight [kg] 0.072 0.072 0.097 0.072 0.072 0.097 0.072 0.072 0.097

Package [pcs] 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

„The installed push-button of black colour and indicator

lights of white colour 230 V a.c. can be replaced. „Modular design with fastening on the „U“ rail wide

35 mm according to EN 60715. Arrangement Type Product code of contacts 1) 11 MTX-11-TB-SG-A230 37274 20 MTX-20-TB-SG-A230 37275 1) Each digit indicates successively the number of make and break contacts

Double control push-buttons „They can be used in both building and industrial installations and in security technology. „For switching two independent electric circuits up to 25 A.

Weight [kg] 0.107 0.107

Package [pcs] 1 1

„The installed push-button black colour can be replaced. „Modular design with fastening on the „U“ rail wide

Arrangement Type Product code of contacts 1) 2x 11 MT2-11-TB 37264 1) Each digit indicates successively the number of make and break contacts

E42

Number of modules 1 1

35 mm according to EN 60715.

Number of modules 1

Weight [kg] 0.0970

Package [pcs] 1


Minia

Other devices

CONTROL PUSH-BUTTONS Accessories Push-buttons „They are intended for replacement of the already installed push-buttons. Colour

Type

red green black white

TC TE TB TG

Product code 8930 8931 8932 8934

Weight [kg] 0.002 0.002 0.002 0.002

Package [pcs] 12 12 12 12

Indicator lights „Indicator light power: 0.8 W „Indicator light contains a LED. „Indicator lights light permanently. Colour of cover red

Rated voltage 230 V a.c. 24 V a.c./d.c. 230 V a.c. 24 V a.c./d.c. 230 V a.c. 24 V a.c./d.c. 230 V a.c. 24 V a.c./d.c.

green yellow white

Type

Product code 11102 11106 11103 11107 11104 11108 11101 11105

SC-A230 SC-X024 SE-A230 SE-X024 SD-A230 SD-X024 SG-A230 SG-X024

Weight [kg] 0.003 0.003 0.003 0.003 0.003 0.003 0.003 0.003

Package [pcs] 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12

Specifications Type

MTX-..

MTX-..-TB-SG-230

MT2-11-TB

Standards Approval marks

EN 60947-5-1

EN 60947-5-1

EN 60947-5-1

01, 10, 22 230/400 V a.c., 220 V d.c. 25 A 25 A 6A 1A 30 000 operating cycles 0.75 ÷ 6 mm2, 2x(0.75 ÷ 2.5) mm2 0.8 Nm

11, 20 230/400 V a.c., 220 V d.c. 25 A 25 A 6A 1A 30 000 operating cycles 0.75 ÷ 6 mm2, 2x(0.75 ÷ 2.5) mm2 0.8 Nm

2x 11 230/400 V a.c., 220 V d.c. 25 A 25 A 6A 1A 30 000 operating cycles 0.75 ÷ 6 mm2, 2x(0.75 ÷ 2.5) mm2 0.8 Nm

Contacts Arrangement of contacts Rated operating voltage Rated thermal current Rated operating current

1)

Ue Ith Ie

AC-12 AC-15 DC-12

Mechanical endurance Connection Torque Push-buttons Colour black, red, green, white 2) Light signalling Power output Ue Rated operating voltage Colour of cover Light Source Dispersion Connection Torque Other data Mounting on “U” rail according to EN 60715 - type TH 35 Degree of protection IP20 Ambient temperature -25 ÷ +55 °C Working position arbitrary 1) Each digit indicates successively the number of make and break contacts 2) For control push-buttons it is possible to replace push-button and indicator lights additionally (see accessories)

black, red, green, white

2)

black, red, green, white 2)

0.8 W 24 V a.c./d.c., 230 V a.c. white, red, green, yellow 2) permanent LED by raster in front of LED 0.75 ÷ 6 mm2, 2x(0.75 ÷ 2.5) mm2 0.8 Nm

-

TH 35 IP20 -25 ÷ +55 °C arbitrary

TH 35 IP20 -25 ÷ +55 °C arbitrary

E43


Minia

Other devices

CONTROL PUSH-BUTTONS Dimensions

7

1

3

2

4

2

4

6

8

6

8

5.5

89

86

89 17.5

17.5

24

5.5

86

5

3

45

7

1

65.5

5

45

MT2-..

65.5

MTX-..

24

44

44 62

62

7

7

Diagram MTX-10-..

MTX-01-..

MTX-22-..

MTX-11-TB-SG-A230

1

1

1

3

5

7

1

2

2

2

4

6

8

2

MT2-11-TB

MTX-20-TB-SG-A230

4 (+)

5

1

6

2

4 (+)

5

1

5

3

7

6

2

6

4

8

Replacement of push-button and indicator light at MTX-..

Replacement of push-buttons at MT2-..

Â&#x201E;Installed push-button or indicator light can be replaced by other one (see accessories).

Â&#x201E;Installed push-button can be replaced by other one (see accessories).

Push-button or indicator light demounting: 1) Insert demounting tool (e.g. paper-clip) in the demounting hole to ensure that the push-button or indicator light jumps up a little. 2) Remove push-button or the indicator light from control push-button.

Push-button demounting: 1) Insert demounting tool (e.g. paper-clip) in the demounting hole to ensure that the push-button jumps up a little. 2 )Remove push-button from control push-button.

Installation of a push-button or indicator light: 3) Insert and press the push-button or the indicator light in the hole in the control push-button.

Installation of a push-button: 3) Insert and press the push-button in the hole in the control push-button.

2

demounting hole

demounting tool

2

1

1

3

E44

2

demounting hole

3

demounting tool

2

1

1

3

3


Minia

Other devices

SIGNAL LIGHTS Signal lights „For signalling operating states, emergency lighting etc. „They can be used in both building and industrial installations and in security technology.

Number of Colour of indicator lights indicator light red 1 2

green white red + green

Rated voltage 230 V a.c. 24 V a.c./d.c. 230 V a.c. 24 V a.c./d.c. 230 V a.c. 230 V a.c.

„Modular design with fastening on the „U“ rail wide

35 mm according to EN 60715. „Empty modules of signal lights enable arbitrary design.

Type MKA-SC-A230 MKA-SC-X024 MKA-SE-A230 MKA-SE-X024 MKA-SG-A230 MKA-SC-SE-A230

Product code 37276 37277 37278 37279 37280 37281

Number of modules 1 1 1 1 1 1

Weight [kg] 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.09

Package [pcs] 1 1 1 1 1 1

Empty modules of signal lights Number of holes for indicator lights 1 2

Type MKA-1 MKA-2

Product code 35558 35559

Number of modules 1 1

Weight [kg] 0.07 0.07

Package [pcs] 1 1

Accessories Indicator lights „Indicator light power: 0.8 W. „Indicator light contains a LED. Colour red green yellow white

Rated voltage 230 V a.c. 24 V a.c./d.c. 230 V a.c. 24 V a.c./d.c. 230 V a.c. 24 V a.c./d.c. 230 V a.c. 24 V a.c./d.c.

„Indicator lights light permanently.

Type SC-A230 SC-X024 SE-A230 SE-X024 SD-A230 SD-X024 SG-A230 SG-X024

Product code 11102 11106 11103 11107 11104 11108 11101 11105

Weight [kg] 0.003 0.003 0.003 0.003 0.003 0.003 0.003 0.003

Package [pcs] 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12

Specifications Type

MKA-..

Standards Approval marks

EN 60947-5-1

Light signalling Power output Rated operating voltage Colour of indicator light Light Source Dispersion Connection Torque Other data Mounting on “U” rail according to EN 60715 - type Degree of protection Ambient temperature Working position

Ue

0.8 W 24 V a.c./d.c., 230 V a.c. red, green, yellow, white permanent LED by raster in front of LED 0.75 ÷ 6 mm2, 2x(0.75 ÷ 2.5) mm2 0.8 Nm TH 35 IP20 -25 ÷ +55 °C arbitrary

E45


Minia

Other devices

SIGNAL LIGHTS Dimensions

4

17.5

5.5

86

2

45

3

89

1

65.5

MKA-..

24 44 62

Diagram

2

MKA-1

MKA-SC-SE-A230

MKA-SC-.. MKA-SE-.. MKA-SG-..

MKA-2

(+)

4 (+)

1

3

2

4 (+)

connectors for indicator lights input

2

4 (+)

(+) 1

3

2

4 (+)

Replacement of indicator lights Â&#x201E;Installed indicator lights can be replaced by other ones (see accessories).

Indicator light demounting: 1) Insert demounting tool (e.g. paper-clip) in the demounting hole and push to ensure that the indicator light jumps up a little. 2) Remove the indicator light from the signal light.

demounting tool

demounting hole

3 2

1

E46

Installation of indicator light: 3) Insert and press the indicator light in the hole in the signal light.

2 1

3


Minia

Other devices

ELECTRIC BELLS AND BUZZERS „For acoustic signalling of device status and the like. „Mechanical design. „Without sparking. „Minimum service life 300 h.

„They are not intended for continuous operation

(continuous duty max. 1 hour). „There are intended for installation in switchboards.

Electric bells Rated operating voltage Ue 8 ÷ 12 V a.c. 230 V a.c.

Type UMZ-A012 UMZ-A230

Product code 35691 35692

Number of modules 1 1

Weight [kg] 0.075 0.075

Package [pcs] 1 1

Product code 35689 35690

Number of modules 1 1

Weight [kg] 0.075 0.075

Package [pcs] 1 1

Electric buzzers „ Single-tone design. Rated operating voltage Ue 8 ÷ 12 V a.c. 230 V a.c.

Type UMB-A012 UMB-A230

Specifications UMZ-.., UMB-..

Type Approval marks Power supply Rated operating voltage Input power Rated frequency Connection Cross-section Torque Conductor L and N Other data Loudness from a distance 0.5 m Mounting on “U” rail according to EN 60715 - type Degree of protection Ambient temperature Working position

Ue fn

0.2 ÷ 2.5 mm2 0.5 Nm arbitrarily to terminals 90 dB (UMZ-..), 80 dB (UMB-..) TH 35 IP20 -20 ÷ +55 °C arbitrary

Dimensions

Diagram

UMZ-.., UMB-..

4.5

UMB

86

45

65.5

UMZ

88 17.5

8 ÷ 12 V a.c., 230 V a.c. 4.6 VA 40 ÷ 60 Hz

24 44 62

E47


Minia

Other devices

POWER SUPPLIES Safety bell transformer „For safe isolation and power supply of circuits of the power input up to 4 VA with safe low voltage 6, 8, 12 V a.c. „For power supply of door bells, gongs, telephones, auxiliary circuits of contactors, lighting, relays etc.

Rated primary voltage UPRI 230 V a.c.

Rated secondary voltage USEC 6, 8, 12 V a.c.

Type UTZ-4-A

Safety power supply „For safe isolation and power supply of circuits of the power input up to 10 VA with safe low voltage 12, 24 V a.c./d.c. „For power supply of door bells, gongs, telephones, door openers, transducers, auxiliary circuits of contactors, lighting, relays etc. „On the secondary side it is equipped with a PTC thermistor (PTC), which limits the overcurrent in the secondary winding at overload.

Rated primary voltage UPRI 230 V a.c.

Rated secondary voltage USEC 12 V a.c. / d.c. 24 V a.c. / d.c.

Type UNZ-10T-X012 UNZ-10T-X024

Controlled safety power supply „For safe isolation and power supply of circuits of the power input up to 10 VA with safe low voltage 24 V a.c. and regulated voltage 1.2 ÷ 24 V d.c. „For power supply of door bells, gongs, telephones, door openers, transducers, auxiliary circuits of contactors, lighting, relays etc. „On the secondary side it is equipped with a PTC thermistor (PTC), which limits the overcurrent in the secondary winding at overload.

Rated primary voltage UPRI 230 V a.c.

E48

Rated secondary Type voltage USEC 24 V a.c., 1.2 ÷ 24 V d.c. UNZR-10T-X024

„The transformer is unconditionally short-circuit-proof

– withstands continuous short-circuit even without a backup protection device, and continues to perform all its functions as soon as the overload or short-circuit ceases. „Degree of protection IP30.

Product code 35688

Number of modules 3

Weight [kg] 0.475

Package [pcs] 1

„Current limitation is signalled by two-colour LED, which

goes red. „Presence of UPRI is signalled by two-colour LED going

green. „Protection of outputs by blocking capacitors against

interference. „Equipped with voltage stabilizers.

Product code 35685 35686

Number of modules 3 3

Weight [kg] 0.36 0.36

Package [pcs] 1 1

„Current limitation is signalled by two-colour LED, which

goes red. „Presence of UPRI is signalled by two-colour LED going

green. „Protection of outputs by blocking capacitors against

interference. „Equipped with voltage stabilizers.

Product code 35687

Number of modules 3

Weight [kg] 0.36

Package [pcs] 1


Minia

Other devices

POWER SUPPLIES Specifications Type

UTZ-4-A

UNZ-10T-..

UNZR-10T-X024

Standards Approval marks

EN 60742

EN 60742

EN 60742

4 VA 230 V a.c. 6 V a.c. / 0.33 A 8 V a.c. / 0.33 A 12 V a.c. / 0.33 A -

10 VA 1) 230 V a.c. 12 V a.c. / 0.8 A 24 V a.c. / 0.36 A

10 VA 1) 230 V a.c. 24 V a.c. / 0.36 A

12 V d.c. / 0.4 A 24 V d.c. / 0.2 A 50 Hz II green LED red LED

1.2 ÷ 24 V d.c. / 0.08 ÷ 0.3 A 50 Hz II green LED red LED

0.2 ÷ 2.5 mm2 0.5 Nm

0.2 ÷ 2.5 mm2 0.5 Nm

TH 35 IP20 -10 ÷ +35 °C arbitrary

TH 35 IP20 -10 ÷ +35 °C arbitrary

Power output Rated primary voltage Rated secondary voltage AC 2) / current

UPRI USEC / ISEC

Rated secondary voltage DC 2) / current

USEC / ISEC

fn Rated frequency 50 Hz Protection class II Light indication presence UPRI Light indication current limitation Connection Cross-section 0.2 ÷ 2.5 mm2 Torque 0.5 Nm Other data Mounting on “U” rail according to EN 60715 - typ TH 35 Degree of protection IP20 Ambient temperature -30 ÷ +35 °C Working position arbitrary 1) At simultaneous loading of both AC and DC outputs the sum of both power inputs must not exceed 8 VA 2) The transformers have a higher voltage at off-load connection. The shown voltages are those at rated load.

Diagram

52.5

52.5

5.3

52.5

86

45

UNZR-10T-X024

65.5

UNZ-10T-..

88

UTZ-4-A

24 44 62

3

Dimensions UTZ-4-A 3

6V

12V 4 5

UNZ-10T-.. 4 8V

6

UNZR-10T-X024 5

+

USEC AC

6

5 +

USEC AC

6

UREG DC

USEC DC 1

4

2 -

230V 3

-

UPRI 1

2

3

UPRI 1

2

E49


Minia

Other devices

POWER SUPPLIES Characteristics Load characteristic UTZ-4-A Usec [V]

20 18 16 Usec = 12 V

14 12 Usec = 8 V

10 8 6 4

Usec = 6 V

2 0 0

200

400

600

800

1000

1200

1400 Isec [mA]

Load characteristic UNZ-10T-.., UNZR-10T-X024 - AC outlet At ambient temperature +23 °C Usec [V]

30 28

UNZR-10T-X024 - 24 V a.c.

26

UNZ-10T-X024 - 24 V a.c.

24 22 20 18 16

UNZ-10T-X012 - 12 V a.c.

14 12 10 8 6 4 2 0 0

200

400

600

800

1000

1200

1400

1600 Isec [mA]

Load characteristic UNZ-10T-.., UNZR-10T-X024 - DC outlet At ambient temperature +23 °C Usec [V]

26

UNZR-10T-X024 - 1,2-24 V d.c.

24 22 20

UNZ-10T-X024 - 24 V d.c.

18 16 14 12

UNZ-10T-X012 - 12 V d.c.

10 8 6 4 2 0 0

100

200

300

400

500

600

700

800 Isec [mA]

„ Imax „Notice: at simultaneous loading of both AC and DC outputs the sum of both power inputs must not exceed 8 VA! „At overload the red indicator light LIM on the front panel of the device goes on. Output current will drop to approx. 100 mA. „It is necessary to disconnect the load at the output to renew the function.

E50


Minia

Other devices

SOCKET OUTLETS „Modular design with fastening on the „U“ rail wide

„ZSF-.. according to DIN 49440 - a connector of type F

35 mm according to EN 60715. „ZSE-.. according to IEC 60884-1 – a connector of type E; ensures contact by means of the connector with two round plug contacts and central earthing pin. This type is sometimes referred to as French one.

(Schuko), sometimes referred to as German one. It differs in the design of the earthing contact, which consists of two contact metal strips placed on the connector perimeter.

Socket outlets Type

Use

ZSE-03 ZSE-06 ZSF-03 ZSF-06

IEC 60884-1 IEC 60884-1 DIN (“SCHUKO”) DIN (“SCHUKO”)

Connection

Product code 37290 37291 37292 37293

bottom bottom and top bottom bottom and top

Number of modules 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5

Weight [kg] 0.15 0.15 0.15 0.15

Package [pcs] 1 1 1 1

Specifications Type

ZSE-.., ZSF-..

Standards Approval marks

IEC 60884-1, DIN 49440

Ue/In

Rated operating voltage/current Mounting on “U” rail according to EN 60715 - type Ambient temperature Degree of protection Connection

230 V a.c./16 A TH 35 -25 ÷ +55 °C IP20 1 ÷ 16 mm2, 2x (1 ÷ 4) mm2

44

4.5

90

ZSE-.., ZSF-..

45

ZSE-..

90

Diagram

45

Dimensions

41 60

ZSF-..

44

4.5

41 62.5

E51


Minia

Other devices

INTERCONNECTING BUSBARS Interconnecting busbars „For interconnection of 1 to 4-pole circuit breakers, tumbler switches, residual current circuit breakers, lightning current arresters and surge voltage arresters. „For interconnection of a series of single-phase or threephase circuit breakers and tumbler switches, on which an auxiliary switch is mounted.

Number Cross-section of outlets [mm2] 10 2 16 3 16 4 16 10 6 16 17.8 1 10 12 16 12 57 16 20 37 24 27 2) 16 2 17.8 28 x 2 16 10 2x3 16 10 3x3 16 17.8 3 10 4x3 16 10 19 x 3 16 2 x 17.8 + 1 x 26.8 16 x 3 16 3+N 17.8 27 x 2 16 4 17.8 14 x 4 16 10 12 16 17.8 10 1 57 16 37 16 27 37 25 10 6x2 16 2 17.8 28 x 2 16 2+N 1 x 17.8 + 1 x 26.8 22 x 2 16 10 2x3 16 10 3x3 16 17.8 10 4x3 16 3 10 19 x 3 16 2x 17.8 + 1x 26.8 16 x 3 16 16 27 12 x 3 25 17.8 27 x 2 16 3+N 1 x 17.8 + 1 x 26.8 22 x 2 16 17.8 14 x 4 16 4 27 9x4 25 1) The busbar is manufactured as enclosed one 2) For single-pole devices with auxiliary switch pin

fork

Busbar Number shape of poles

E52

Spacing of outlets [mm]

„Busbars G1L-.., G2L-.., G3L-.., G4L-.. with forks into the

head part of the terminal. „Busbars S1L-.., S2L-.., S3L-.., S4L-.. with pins into the

clamp part of the terminal. „After shortening of busbars to particular length it is

necessary to remove the burrs of copper in order to prevent short-circuit etc. Where possible use end covers EKC to cover the ends of interconnecting busbars.

Type G1L-30-10 G1L-30-16 G1L-50-16-L G1L-65-16-L G1L-106-10 G1L-106-16 G1L-210-10 G1L-210-16 G1L-1000-12 G1L-1000-16-L G1L-1000-20 G1L-27-1000-24 G2L-1000-16 G2L-1000-16-DC G3L-106-10 G3L-106-16 G3L-160-10 G3L-160-16 G3L-210-10 G3L-210-16 G3L-1000-10C G3L-1000-16C G3L+9-1000-16 G3L+N-1000-16 G4L-1000-16 S1L-210-10 S1L-210-16 S1L-1000-10 S1L-1000-16 S1L-27-1000-16 S1L-27-1000-25 S2L-210-10 S2L-210-16 S2L-1000-16 S2L+N+9-1000-16 S3L-106-10 S3L-106-16 S3L-160-10 S3L-160-16 S3L-210-10 S3L-210-16 S3L-1000-10 S3L-1000-16 S3L+9-1000-16 S3L-27-1000-16 S3L-27-1000-25 S3L+N-1000-16 S3L+N+9-1000-16 S4L-1000-16 S4L-27-1000-25

Product code 37352 37356 39789 39790 37353 37357 37354 37358 37355 39788 37359 37360 37361 39080 37362 37366 37363 37367 37364 37368 37365 37369 37370 37372 37371 38475 37374 37373 37375 37376 37377 38476 38477 37378 39849 38478 38479 38480 38481 38482 38483 38484 37379 38485 37380 37381 38487 39616 38486 37382

End cap - 1) - 1) EKC-1 EKC-1 - 1) - 1) - 1) - 1) EKC-1 EKC-1 EKC-2+3 EKC-2+3 - 1) - 1) - 1) - 1) - 1) - 1) EKC-3 EKC-2+3 EKC-2+3 EKC-4 EKC-4 - 1) - 1)

EKC-1 EKC-1 EKC-1 - 1) - 1)

EKC-2+3 EKC-2+3 - 1) - 1) - 1) - 1) - 1) - 1)

EKC-3 EKC-2+3 EKC-2+3 EKC-3-36 EKC-4 EKC-4 EKC-4 EKC-3-36

Weight [kg] 0.008 0.012 0.019 0.024 0.023 0.037 0.045 0.073 0.227 0.312 0.367 0.307 0.477 0.467 0.046 0.074 0.069 0.111 0.091 0.147 0.457 0.737 0.614 0.983 0.983 0.045 0.047 0.204 0.302 0.201 0.315 0.067 0.11 0.477 0.71 0.055 0.08 0.085 0.115 0.11 0.15 0.505 0.737 0.72 0.537 0.995 1.205 0.983 1.205 1.327

Package [pcs] 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 20 20 25 25 25 25 25 25 20 20 20 15 15 50 50 50 50 50 30 20 20 20 20 25 25 25 25 25 25 20 20 20 20 10 15 15 15 5


Minia

Other devices

INTERCONNECTING BUSBARS Accessories End caps „For covering the ends of connecting busbars. Type

Product code 37383 37384 37385 37386 37387

EKC-1 EKC-2+3 EKC-3 EKC-3-36 EKC-4

Description

Weight [kg] 0.0005 0.001 0.001 0.002 0.002

for 1-pole rails cross-section 10, 12, 16 mm2 for 2-pole rails and for 3-pole rails cross-section 16 mm2 for 3-pole rails cross-section 10 mm2 for 3-pole rails and for 4-pole rails cross-section 25 mm2 for 4-pole rails cross-section 16 mm2

Power supply unit „It enables power supply of interconnecting busbars by conductors of cross section up to 35 mm2. „The blocks can be assembled in series to create a multipole connection unit. Type

„Degree of protection IP20.

Product code 37388

ES-35-GS

Package [pcs] 10 10 10 10 10

Weight [kg] 0.035

Package [pcs] 10

Specifications Type Ue

Rated operating voltage Loading current Cross-section Short-circuit strength with backup fuse 250 A gG Overvoltage category Rated impulse withstand voltage Degree of protection Busbar material Insulation material

G1L-.., S1L-..,G2L-1000-16-DC

G2L-..,G3L-..,G4L-..,S2L-..,S3L-..,S4L-..

690 V a.c. / 1000 V d.c. 63 ÷ 180 A 10 ÷ 25 mm2 50 kA III 8 kV IP20 E-Cu-F25 PC/ABS-Blend

415 V a.c. 63 ÷ 180 A 10 ÷ 25 mm2 50 kA III 8 kV IP20 E-Cu-F25 PC/ABS-Blend

Max. loading current per phase Rail cross-section 2

2

10 mm 12 mm Power supply from the rail edge 63 A 65 A Power supply from the rail centre 1) 100 A 110 A 1) Max. loading current in one direction must not be higher than max. loading current at power supply from the rail edge

16 mm2 80 A 130 A

20 mm2 90 A 150 A

24 mm2 100 A 170 A

25 mm2 100 A 180 A

Diagram G1L-.., S1L-..

L1

G2L-.., S2L-..

L1

L2 (N)

G3L-.., S3L-..

S2L+N-..

L1

N

L2

N

L1

L2

L3

G4L-.., S4L-..

L1

L2

L3

G3L+N-.., S3L+N-..

N

L1

N

L2

N

L3

N

E53


Minia

Other devices

INTERCONNECTING BUSBARS Dimensions G1L-30-10, G1L-106-10, G1L-210-10 17.8

G1L-30-16, G1L-106-16, G1L-210-16 17.8

1

11

6

1.5

11

30 (G1L-30-10)

30 (G1L-30-16)

4

4

106 (G1L-106-16)

106 (G1L-106-10)

210 (G1L-210-16)

210 (G1L-210-10)

G1L-1000-12

G1L-1000-20 996.8

996.8 17.8

6

1.5

12

57 x 1

17.8

6

12

2

15 6

5

14

6

6

57x 1

16

29.5

14

28

6 6

6 6

6

16

G1L-50-16-L

15

G1L-65-16-L 35.6

G1L-1000-16-L 53.4

17.8

996.8 6

12

1.5

57 x 1

17.8

6

12

19 5

5 14

14

14

G1L-27-1000-24

G2L-1000-16 979

972 27

6

12

2

28 x 2

17.8

6

1.5

11

17

29

5

15

6

6

37 x 1

1.5

19

6 5

19

6

1.5

6

6

17.8

14 15

G3L-106-10, G3L-160-10, G3L-210-10 17.8

1

11

17.8

6

1.5

11

106 (G3L-106-10)

17

13

30

26

6

6

6

G3L-106-16, G3L-160-16, G3L-210-16

15

106 (G3L-106-16)

160 (G3L-160-10)

15

160 (G3L-160-16)

210 (G3L-210-10)

210 (G3L-210-16)

G3L-1000-10C

G3L-1000-16C 996.8

17.8

6

996.8

11

1

19 x 3

6

1.5

11

6

17.8

17

30

26

6

13.5

19 x 3

15

15

G3L+N-1000-16, G4L-1000-16

G3L+9-1000-16 971.6 17.8

26.8

979

6

11

1.5

14 x 4

17.8

6

1.5

11

17

17

30

30

6

6

16 x 3

20.5

15

ES-35-GS

G2L-1000-16-DC 17.7

26

979 17.8

6

1.5

11

19.2

E54

17

29

33

6

28 x 2

15


Minia

Other devices

INTERCONNECTING BUSBARS Dimensions S1L-210-10, (S1L-210-16)

S1L-1000-10

4

1(1.5)

996.8 17.8

1

16

28.5

57 x 1

4

5

14

17.8

216

4

14

S1L-1000-16

S1L-27-1000-16 996.8

17.8

27

1.5

4

1.5

37 x 1

15

5

5

15

57 x 1

972

4

14

15

S2L-210-10, S2L-210-16

S1L-27-1000-25

17.8

4

1.5

972 6.5

27

2

5

18

17

28.5

37 x 1

210

20

S2L-1000-16

15

S2L+N+9-1000-16 970.1

979 17.8

23 x 2

26.8

4

1.5

17

29

28 x 2

1.5

17

4

29

17.8

15

15

S3L-106-10, S3L-106-10, S3L210-10 17.8

S3L-106-16, S3L-106-16, S3L210-16

4

17.8

4

1.5

106 (S3L-106-10)

16

14

27

25

1

106 (S3L-106-16)

15

160 (S3L-160-10)

17

160 (S3L-160-16)

212 (S3L-210-10)

212 (S3L-210-16)

S3L-1000-16

S3L-1000-10 996.8

996.8 17.8

1.5

4

19 x 3

1

15

S3L-27-1000-16

15

S3L+9-1000-16 970.1

938 4

3x 16

1.5

1.5

17

29

S3L+N-1000-16

4

29

12 x 3

26.8

17.8

17

26.8

12

17

29

19 x 3

4

25

17.8

15

S3L+N+9-1000-16

15 979

17.8

1.5

4

22 x 2

17.8

26.8

1.5

4

17

17

30

30

4x 14

20.5

S3L-27-1000-25

20.5

S4L-27-1000-25 945

945 27

2

4x 9

6

42

2

27

6.5

27

27

43

3x 12

18.3

24.6

E55


Minia

Other devices

INTERCONNECTING BUSBARS Examples of use of interconnecting busbars INTERCONNECTING BUSBARS WITH FORKS 1-pole interconnecting busbars For interconnection of 1-pole devices in the head part of the terminal. Use: LPE, LPN, SJB, SVL, SVM, APN.

1-pole interconnecting busbars with spacing 27 mm For interconnection of 1-pole devices with auxiliary switch in the head part of the terminal. Use: LPE, LPN, APN.

2-pole interconnecting busbars For interconnection of 2-pole devices in the head part of the terminal. Use: LPE, LPN, APN, OFE, OFI.

3-pole interconnecting busbars For interconnection of 3-pole devices in the head part of the terminal. Use: LPE, LPN, SJB, SVL, SVM, APN.

3-pole interconnecting busbars with a gap on the auxiliary switch For interconnection of 3-pole devices with auxiliary switch in the head part of the terminal. Use: LPE,, LPN,, APN.

4-pole interconnecting busbars For interconnection of 4-pole devices in the head part of the terminal. Use: LPE, LPN, OFI, OFE, APN.

1-pole interconnecting busbars For interconnection of 1-pole devices in clamp part of the terminal. Use: LPE, LPN, SJB, SVL, SVM, APN.

1-pole interconnecting busbars with spacing 27 mm For interconnection of 1-pole circuit breakers LST in clamp part of the terminal or for interconnection of 1-pole devices with auxiliary switch in clamp part of the terminal. Use: LPE, LPN, LST, APN, AST.

2-pole interconnecting busbars For interconnection of 2-pole devices in clamp part of the terminal. Use: LPE, LPN, OLE, OLI, OFE, OFI, APN.

3-pole interconnecting busbars For interconnection of 3-pole devices in clamp part of the terminal. Use: LPE, LPN, APN.

3-pole interconnecting busbars with spacing 27 mm For interconnection of 3-pole circuit breakers LST in clamp part of the terminal or for interconnection of 1-pole devices with auxiliary switch in clamp part of the terminal. Use: LPE, LPN, LST, APN, AST.

4-pole interconnecting busbars with spacing 27 mm For interconnection of 4-pole circuit breakers LST in clamp part of the terminal. Use: LST, AST.

INTERCONNECTING BUSBARS WIHT PINS

E56


Minia

Other devices

TERMINAL EXTENSIONS Terminal extension up to 25 mm2 with fork „For connection of another conductor to the head part of the terminal of a circuit breaker, residual current circuit breaker, tumbler power switch etc. „For example, the best solution is to connect a conductor for power supply of an electric meter in the clamp Type AS-25-G

Product code 37390

Accessories to LPE, LPN, OFE, OFI, SJB, SJBC, SVBC, SVC, SVM, APN

Terminal extension up to 25 mm2 with pin „For connection of conductors to the clamp part of the terminal. Type AS-25-S

Product code 37389

AS-50-S-AL01

Product code 38749

Product code

CS-FH000-3NP95

13740

CS-FH000-1NP95 CS-FH000-3NV95

Package [pcs] 30

Weight [kg] 0.014

Package [pcs] 30

„Cross-section of Cu conductors: 2.5 ÷ 50 mm2. „Cross-section of Al conductors: 2.5 ÷ 50 mm2.

Accessories to LPE, LPN, LST, OLE, OLI, OFE, OFI, SJB, SJBC, SVBC, SVC, SVM, APN, AST

Terminal extensions up to 95 mm2 „For connection of Cu/Al conductors of cross section 35 ÷  95 mm2. Type

Weight [kg] 0.013

„Conductor cross-section: 6 ÷ 25 mm2.

Accessories to OFI-..-2-...., OFE-..-2-...., RLP

Terminal extension up to 50 mm2 „For connection of Al or Cu conductors. Type

part of the circuit breaker terminal, and another conductor through the connecting adapter AS-25-G in the head part of the circuit breaker terminal. „Conductor cross-section: 6 ÷ 25 mm2.

Weight [kg] 0.018

Package [pcs] 1

„With direct or outbowed terminal. Accessories to

Weight [kg]

Package [pcs]

straight terminal – the package contains LST, SJBplus, SJB-NPE, AST the set of 3 pieces

0.176

1

14378

straight terminal

LST, SJBplus, SJB-NPE, AST

0.06

1

13742

outbowed terminal – the package contains the set of 3 pieces

LST, SJBplus, SJB-NPE, AST

0.184

1

Terminal extension 3x10 mm2 „For connection of 3 conductors/device pole of cross section 10 mm2. Type N3x10-FH000

Product code 14127

Accessories to LST, OLE, OLI, SJB, SJBC, SVBC, SVM, AST

Weight [kg] 0.035

Package [pcs] 1

E57


Minia

Other devices

TERMINAL EXTENSIONS Dimensions AS-25-S 17

N3x10-FH000

AS-50-AL01 17

17

23.5

8

24.5

20.5

15

24.5

17.5

13

20.5

15

27

AS-25-G

6

2.5

2.5

4

7

11.5

CS-FH000-...NP95

7

7

6

CS-FH000-3NV95 23

32.5

38

32.5

38

23

10

4

4

10

Examples of use of connecting adapters and blocks AS-25-G For connection of another conductor of cross section up to 25 mm2 to the head part of the terminal. Use: LPE, LPN, OFE, OFI, SJB, SJBC, SVBC, SVC, SVM, APN.

CS-FH000-3NP95, CS-FH000-1NP95, CS-FH000-3NV95 For connection of Cu/Al conductors of cross section up to 95 mm2 to the clamp part of the terminal. Use: LST, SJBplus, SJB-NPE, AST.

E58

AS-25-S For connection of conductors of cross section up to 25 mm2 to the clamp part of the terminal. Use: OFI-..-2-.., OFE-..-2-.., RLP.

AS-50-S-AL01 For connection of Cu/Al conductors of cross section up to 50 mm2 to the clamp part of the terminal. Use: LPE, LPN, LST, OLE, OLI, OFE, OFI, SJB, SJBC, SVBC, SVC, SVM, APN, AST.

N3x10-FH000 For connection of three conductors of cross section 10 mm2 to the clamp part of one terminal. Use: LST, OLE, OLI, SJB, SJBC, SVBC, SVM, AST.


Minia

Other devices

TERMINAL BOARD Terminal board „For branching lr connection of PEN, PE, N and L conductors. „They are used in switchboards, which are not delivered with terminal blocks. Colour

Number of terminals 7 x 16 mm2 12 x 16 mm2 15 x 16 mm2 7 x 16 mm2 12 x 16 mm2 15 x 16 mm2 7 x 16 mm2 12 x 16 mm2 15 x 16 mm2

blue green grey 1)

„Mounting on 35 mm „U“ rail according to EN 60715. „Colour: green, blue, grey.

Type

Product code 35901 35902 35903 35904 35905 35906 35898 35899 35900

CS-N7 CS-N12 CS-N15 CS-PE7 CS-PE12 CS-PE15 CS-L7 1) CS-L12 1) CS-L15 1)

Weight [kg] 0.026 0.030 0.048 0.026 0.030 0.048 0.026 0.030 0.048

Package [pcs] 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10

covered design

Specifications Type Standards Approval marks

CS-PE, CS-N, CS-L

Mounting on “U” rail according to EN 60715 - type Connection

TH 35 1 ÷ 16 mm2

EN 60947-1

Dimensions CS-N12, CS-PE12

CS-N7, CS-PE7

51.5 104

51.5

85

51.5

CS-N15, CS-PE15

23

5.5

23.5 4.5

25

6

5.5

23.5

23 6

5.5

4.5

25

23.5

23

4.5

25

CS-L12

CS-L7

107

88

53

CS-L15

13

13 13

6

6

6

26

26

26

E59


Minia NOTES

E60

Other devices


Minia

Modular devices

GLOSSARY Note: Precise definitions and texts relating to the specified terms, are contained in relevant standards see Name.

Name

Symbol

Interpretation

Rated operating voltage EN 60898-1; 5.2.1.1 EN 60947-1; 4.3.1.1

Ue

The value of voltage stated by the manufacturer. Relevant tests or utilization categories relate to it. Together with rated (operating) current, it determines the use of the device. Maximum value of rated operating voltage must never be higher than the value of rated insulation voltage.

Max. operating voltage

Umax

Maximum value of operating voltage, at which device function is not endangered.

Min. operating voltage

Umin

Minimum value of voltage conditioning correct function (of circuit breakers, switches etc.) or test of correct function (residual current circuit breakers).

Rated current EN 60898-1; 5.2.2 IEC 755; 4.2.5 EN 61008-1; 5.2.2 EN 61009-1; 5.2.2

In

The value of current assigned to a circuit breaker or residual current circuit breaker by the manufacturer, which the device can conduct continuously. For circuit breakers and residual current circuit breakers with overcurrent release also at a reference temperature.

Rated operating current EN 60947-1; 4.3.2.3

Ie

Rated operating current of the device is stated by the manufacturer with regard to rated operating voltage, rated frequency, rated duty, utilization category and enclosure type, if applicable.

Utilization category EN 60947-1; 4.4; Supplement A

AC-xx DC-xx

Utilization category of a device defines its assumed use. It is characterized by one or several operating conditions: current expressed as multiple of Ie, voltage expressed as multiple of Ue, power factor or time constant, short-circuit behaviour, selectivity, other operating conditions depending on circumstances.

Rated thermal current without cover EN 60947-1; 4.3.2.1

Ith

Maximum value of current, which can be transferred by open device in eight-hour operation without exceeding its permissible temperature rise.

Rated thermal current with cover EN 60947-1; 4.3.2.2

Ithe

Maximum value of current, which can be transferred by a device in specified enclosure in eight-hour operation without exceeding its permissible temperature rise.

Rated short-circuit ultimate breaking capacity EN 60898-1; 3.5.5.1

Icu

The value of short-circuit current expressed as root-mean-square value of alternating component of prospective short-circuit current in place of utilization of the circuit breaker, which it must be able to switch off repeatedly. After the test the circuit breaker need not be able to conduct 0.85 multiple of its non-switching current for an agreed time.

Rated short-circuit service breaking capacity EN 60898-1; 3.5.5.2

Ics

The value of short-circuit current expressed as root-mean-square value of alternating component of prospective short-circuit current in place of utilization of the circuit breaker, which it must be able to switch off repeatedly under test conditions (EN 60 898-1; 9.12.11.4.2 and 9.12.12.1). After the test the circuit breaker shall be able to conduct 0.85 multiple of its non-switching current for an agreed time.

Rated short-circuit breaking capacity EN 60898-1; 5.2.4

Icn

The value of rated short-circuit ultimate breaking capacity stated for this circuit breaker by the manufacturer in accordance with test conditions (EN 60 898-1; 9.12.11.4.2 and 9.12.12.1) The following must apply: Icn ≥ Ik“ It determines maximum value of I2t [A2s] released by the circuit breaker depending on its In, Icn and type of tripping characteristic. It makes it possible to state selectivity with a backup fuse (I2t released by the circuit breakers must be less than blowing current I2t of the fuse) and short-circuit protection of the cable (I2t released by the circuit breaker must be less or equal to S2k2 of the cable). On the basis of classes of energy limitation it is not possible to state unambiguously selectivity of two circuit breakers in series.

Energy limitation class EN 60898-1; Supplement ZA

Rated frequency EN 60898-1; 5.2.3 EN 60947-1; 4.3.3 IEC 755; 4.2.5

fn

Network frequency the device is designed for and the other characteristic values correspond to.

F1


Minia

Modular devices

GLOSSARY

Name

Symbol

Interpretation

Rated conditional short-circuit current EN 60947-1; 4.3.6.4 IEC 755; 4.3.2

Inc

The value of prospective short-circuit current stated by the manufacturer, which can be reliably transferred by a short-circuit protection device stated by the manufacturer for the time of operation of this device. The following must apply: Inc ≥ Ik“

Initial peak short-circuit current EN 60909-0; 1.3.5

Ik“

The value of short-circuit current at the moment of its origin in given point of wiring expressed as rootmean-square value of alternating symmetric component of prospective short-circuit current.

Prospective current EN 60898-1; 3.5.2

Ip

Current, which would have passed through the circuit, if every pole of the circuit breaker be replaced by a conductor of a negligible impedance.

Rated residual operating current IEC 755; 4.2.2 EN 61008-1; 5.2.3 EN 61009-1; 5.2.3

IΔn

Root-mean-square value of residual operating current stated for the residual current circuit breaker by the manufacturer, at which the residual current circuit breaker must operate under stated conditions.

Rated impulse withstand voltage EN 60664-1; 1.3.8.1; 1.3.9.2 EN 60947-1; 4.3.1.3 EN 60898-1; 5.2.1.3 EN 61008-1; 5.2.1.Z1

Uimp

Peak value of voltage impulse of a prescribed shape and polarity, which the device is able to withstand without failure under stated conditions and to which the values of aerial distances relate. Uimp of the device must be equal to or higher than the value stated for transient overvoltage in the point of the circuit (overvoltage category) the device is used in.

Overvoltage category EN 60664-1; 2.2.2.1 EN 60947-1; 2.5.60 EN 60898-1; 3.6.5 EN 61008-1; 3.Z1.5 EN 61009-1; 3.Z1.5

Numerically defined level of transient overvoltage i.e. overvoltage originating from atmospheric or switching overvoltage. Standard EN 60664-1 states for electric equipment overvoltage categories: Overvoltage category IV: beginning of installation, outside lead Overvoltage category III: fixed wiring Overvoltage category II: appliances Overvoltage category I: light-current appliance

Maximum constant operating voltage EN 61643-11; 3.11

Uc

Maximum root-mean-square value of alternating or direct current voltage, which can be permanently applied to the arrester terminals. It must be equal to or higher than rated network voltage.

Voltage protection level EN 61643-11; 3.15

Up

Maximum instantaneous value of voltage on the arrester, determined by appropriate tests. It characterizes arrester action in voltage limitation on its terminals.

Rated discharge current EN 61643-11; 3.8

In

Peak value of current with impulse shape 8/20 μs, for which the arrester is rated. It can pass through it repeatedly. (It relates to T2.)

Maximum discharge current EN 61643-11; 3.10

Imax

Peak value of current with impulse shape 8/20 μs, at which the surge voltage arrester still is not damaged. This current can pass through the arrester twice, while the disconnecting device can only react at the second impulse. (It relates to T2.)

Lightning current EN 61643-11; 3.9

Iimp

It is defined by three parameters – peak current Ipeak, charge Q and specific energy W/R. Lightning current arresters must be able to release impulse current at least twice without their damage. (It relates to T1.)

Quenching follow-current EN 61643-11; 3.41

Ifi

Short-circuit current, the arrester itself is able to interrupt. (It relates to T1.)

Rated loading current EN 61643-11; 3.14

IL

Maximum permanent rated root-mean-square or direct current, which can flow in a load connected to protected output terminals of the surge voltage arrester. (It relates tok T3.)

F2


Modular devices

NOTES

Minia


Minia NOTES

Modular devices


OEZ s.r.o. Šedivská 339 561 51 Letohrad Czech Republic tel.: +420 465 672 111 +420 465 672 101 fax: +420 465 672 398 +420 465 672 151 e-mail: oeztrade.cz@oez.com www.oez.com

www.oez.com


Minia

N1-2011-A

Modular devices

www.oez.com

Minia

Any changes reserved

Modular devices

Modular devices Minia  

Modular devices MINIA are protection, switching and similar devices for installation in electric switchboards. These are especially circuit...

Read more
Read more
Similar to
Popular now
Just for you